summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/Master/texmf-doc
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
Diffstat (limited to 'Master/texmf-doc')
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/LaTeX-info.html47
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/baselineskip.html31
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/boldmath.html42
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/caption.html19
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/declarations.html51
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ellipses.html23
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/emph.html24
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ensuremath.html23
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/externals.html189
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/fonts2e.html51
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/fragile.html59
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/frenchsp.html16
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/index.html98
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/input.html95
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/item.html30
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/lefteqn.html41
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/lists.html58
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-111.html25
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-115.html82
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-117.html45
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-118.html25
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-119.html39
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-13.html62
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-130.html67
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-131.html24
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-137.html30
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-138.html31
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-140.html20
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-141.html70
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-142.html19
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-143.html149
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-164.html68
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-165.html24
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-169.html26
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-17.html51
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-170.html41
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-171.html32
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-172.html24
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-173.html18
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-174.html25
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-175.html22
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-176.html26
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-177.html55
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-178.html44
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-179.html35
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-18.html88
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-180.html40
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-181.html27
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-182.html26
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-183.html17
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-184.html17
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-185.html17
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-186.html17
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-187.html20
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-188.html16
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-189.html17
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-19.html50
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-190.html17
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-191.html28
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-192.html30
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-195.html20
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-198.html23
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-199.html22
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-2.html328
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-20.html35
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-200.html44
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-201.html18
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-202.html68
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-203.html34
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-204.html20
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-205.html42
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-206.html17
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-207.html26
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-21.html20
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-210.html18
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-211.html32
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-212.html18
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-213.html16
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-214.html28
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-216.html22
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-217.html22
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-218.html25
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-22.html46
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-220.html17
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-221.html19
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-222.html52
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-223.html50
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-224.html35
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-225.html45
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-226.html26
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-227.html17
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-228.html29
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-229.html27
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-230.html26
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-231.html31
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-232.html28
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-233.html16
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-234.html31
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-235.html21
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-236.html21
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-237.html37
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-238.html18
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-239.html27
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-240.html16
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-241.html27
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-242.html15
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-243.html14
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-244.html30
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-245.html31
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-246.html18
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-247.html19
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-248.html21
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-249.html18
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-250.html41
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-251.html22
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-252.html48
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-253.html15
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-254.html16
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-255.html14
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-256.html25
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-257.html29
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-258.html25
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-259.html20
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-260.html95
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-261.html17
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-262.html62
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-263.html33
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-264.html33
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-265.html35
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-266.html17
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-267.html52
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-268.html42
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-269.html19
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-27.html65
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-271.html22
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-275.html17
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-276.html15
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-277.html25
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-279.html19
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-280.html18
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-281.html22
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-282.html17
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-283.html21
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-284.html18
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-286.html23
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-287.html29
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-288.html26
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-289.html22
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-29.html28
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-291.html22
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-293.html17
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-294.html35
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-296.html30
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-297.html26
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-298.html25
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-299.html17
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-3.html88
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-30.html42
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-300.html25
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-301.html25
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-302.html33
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-303.html27
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-304.html21
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-305.html21
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-306.html37
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-307.html35
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-308.html20
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-309.html14
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-31.html32
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-310.html20
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-311.html29
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-312.html23
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-313.html18
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-314.html25
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-315.html21
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-316.html18
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-317.html15
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-318.html21
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-319.html23
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-323.html19
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-324.html30
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-328.html16
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-329.html24
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-330.html16
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-331.html20
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-332.html18
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-335.html28
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-336.html28
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-337.html23
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-338.html22
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-339.html27
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-340.html25
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-341.html31
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-342.html39
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-345.html20
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-346.html17
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-347.html29
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-37.html24
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-39.html25
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-401.html96
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-402.html41
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-403.html116
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-404.html75
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-405.html72
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-406.html58
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-407.html90
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-408.html79
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-409.html76
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-420.html26
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-421.html54
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-43.html107
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-430.html25
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-431.html47
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-432.html27
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-433.html26
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-434.html30
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-58.html60
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-67.html49
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-68.html149
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-73.html78
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-77.html21
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-78.html29
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-79.html43
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-81.html20
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-82.html31
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-86.html111
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-87.html21
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-88.html22
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-89.html27
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-90.html21
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-91.html78
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-93.html22
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-97.html20
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-98.html23
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-99.html40
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-tar.html102
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/mathfonts.html87
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/mirror.html125
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/parskip.html27
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/refs.html53
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/stackrel.html90
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/textwidth.html21
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/toc.html26
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/trivlist.html30
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/unitlength.html24
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/versions.html83
246 files changed, 0 insertions, 9140 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/LaTeX-info.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/LaTeX-info.html
deleted file mode 100644
index c6167c134fd..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/LaTeX-info.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,47 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>About Help On LaTeX</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">About Help on LaTeX</font></h1>
-
-<p>These files originated from Help on LaTeX, Version 1.01, 9 Feb 94,
-which can be accessed from the
-<a href="externals.html">"Other on-line LaTeX Information" Page</a>.
-That, in turn, was derived by Norm Walsh from a VMS help file provided
-by George Greenwade. </p>
-
-<p>The current files are a revised and extended version created by
-<a href="http://www.giss.nasa.gov/staff/sgreen/">Sheldon Green</a>.
-He added much information, especially about those parts of LaTeX
-he used most, equations and mathematical symbols. Whether or not
-commands are
-<a href="fragile.html">fragile</a> has been added in most cases.
-Illustrative examples of usage have been added in several instances.
-The hypertext linking has been greatly improved.
-Each file contains a revision date.</p>
-
-<p>Much of the new information has been taken from Lamport, "A Document
-Preparation System:Latex," and from comp.text.tex newsgroup postings. </p>
-
-<p>Since the death of Dr. Green in December 1995, no substantial
-changes have been to these files. Relatively minor changes have
-been made affecting page formatting (HTML) of the files or
-as the result of verifying the external links.</p>
-
-<p>This set of files is also available as a
-<a href="ltx-tar.html">Unix compressed tar file</a>
-which can be installed locally to provide faster access.</p>
-
-<hr>
-Return to the <a href="index.html">Introduction</a>.<br>
-Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>.<br>
-
-<hr>
-
-<address>
-Page revised: 1997:01:14, RBS
-</address>
-
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/baselineskip.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/baselineskip.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 332a6425b99..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/baselineskip.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,31 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \baselineskip and \baselinestretch</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\baselineskip \baselinestretch</font></h1>
-<tt>\baselineskip</tt> is a <a href="ltx-86.html#lencmd">length command</a>
-which specifies the minimum space between the botton of two successive
-lines in a paragraph.
-Its value may be automatically reset by LaTeX, for example, by font changes
-in the text.
-The value used for an entire paragraph is the value
-in effect at the blank line or command which ends the paragraph unit.
-<p>
-<tt>\baselinestretch</tt> scales the value of <tt>\baselineskip</tt>. Its
-default value is 1.0 but it may be reset with a
-<a href="ltx-18.html"><tt>\renewcommand</tt></a> command. If one wants
-to change the spacing in a document one should reset <tt>\baselinestretch</tt>
-and <strong>not</strong> <tt>\baselineskip</tt> as the latter may be reset
-automatically by LaTeX to account for local variations in the text, but it
-is always scaled by the former. In principle, "double spacing" can be obtained
-by <tt>\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{2}</tt>.
-
-<hr>
-See also: <A href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</A><br>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 23 Jun 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/boldmath.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/boldmath.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 368f30f40eb..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/boldmath.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,42 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \boldmath</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\boldmath</font></h1>
-The <tt>\boldmath</tt> <a href="declarations.html">declaration</a> switches
-to a bold math italic font; this causes letters, numbers, and
-<strong>most</strong> symbols used in math mode to be set in a bold type.
-<p>
-(In <a href="versions.html">LaTeX2e</a> <strong>everything</strong> in the
-formula is set in a bold font.)
-<p>
-The <tt>\unboldmath</tt> <a href="declarations.html">declaration</a> switches
-back to the normal math italic font.
-<p>
-Note, these commands should <strong>not</strong> be used in math mode.
-Thus the scope of the <a href="declarations.html">declaration</a> must
-include the math mode expressions to which you want it to apply.
-<p>
-If you
-want only part of a formula to be bold an
-<a href="ltx-265.html"><tt>\mbox</tt></a> command is useful:
-<pre>
- <tt><a href="ltx-115.html#math">\(</a> Regular formula +
- \mbox{\boldmath$ Bold part$} = 0 <a href="ltx-115.html#math">\)</a></tt>
-</pre>
-<p>
-Both <tt>\boldmath</tt> and <tt>\unboldmath</tt> commands are
-<a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>.
-<hr>
-Related topics
-<ul>
-<li><a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a>
-<li><a href="mathfonts.html">Math fonts and styles</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</a> and <a href="ltx-177.html">Styles</a>
-</ul>
-Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 7 Jul 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/caption.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/caption.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 357cdf7892a..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/caption.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,19 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX caption</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\caption</font></h1>
-<tt>\caption[lst-entry]{Text of table caption}</tt> is used to
-generate a caption for a figure or a table.
-<p>
-the optional <tt>lst-entry</tt> may be used to generate an
-entry for a list of figures or tables.
-<hr>
-See also <a href="ltx-43.html">picture environment</a><br>
-See also <a href="ltx-67.html">table environment</a><br>
-Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 2 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/declarations.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/declarations.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 06631b5f7a1..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/declarations.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,51 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX Declarations</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Declarations</font></h1>
-A declaration is a LaTeX command that does not act on an argument,
-but which changes the way LaTeX prints the following text or which changes
-the value or meaning of some <a href="ltx-17.html">command</a> or
-<a href="ltx-3.html">counter</a>.
-
-<h2>Scope</h2>
-The <em>scope</em> of a declaration begins with the declaration
-command itself and is ended by the first right
-brace (<tt>}</tt>) or <tt>\end{}</tt> command whose matching
-left brace (<tt>{</tt>) or <tt>\begin{}</tt> precedes the declaration.
-However, the <tt>\begin{}</tt> and <tt>\end{}</tt> of environments
-you create yourself, for example, with the
-<a href="ltx-19.html"><tt>\newenvironment</tt></a> command, do not
-count for calculating the scope of declarations.
-<p>
-The declaration is in effect within its scope, exept that it may be
-countermanded by another declaration whose scope is a subset.
-<p>
-However, some declarations are <em>global</em>; they are in effect until
-countermanded by another declaration. They include
-<ul>
-<li><a href="ltx-195.html"><tt>\addtocounter</tt></a>
-<li><a href="ltx-271.html"><tt>\newcounter</tt></a>
-<li><a href="ltx-310.html"><tt>\setcounter</tt></a>
-<li><a href="ltx-137.html"><tt>\pagenumbering</tt></a>
-<li><a href="ltx-140.html"><tt>\thispagestyle</tt></a>
-<li><a href="ltx-87.html"><tt>\newlength</tt></a>
-<li><a href="ltx-277.html"><tt>\newsavebox</tt></a>
-<li><a href="ltx-20.html"><tt>\newtheorem</tt></a>
-</ul>
-<p>
-Every declaration has an <a href="ltx-27.html">environment</a> of the
-same name. If <tt>\decl</tt> is a declaration command, then
-<pre> <tt>{\decl .... }</tt></pre>
-can also be effected by
-<pre> <tt>\begin{decl} .... \end{decl}</tt></pre>
-If the declaration takes arguments these become additional arguments of the
-<tt>\begin</tt> command.
-<hr>
-See also <a href="ltx-27.html">Environments</a><br>
-Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 Nov 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ellipses.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ellipses.html
deleted file mode 100644
index b2110d115cf..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ellipses.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,23 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX Ellipses</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Ellipses</font></h1>
-Ellipses (three dots) can be produced by the following commands
-<ul>
-<li><A href="ltx-256.html"><tt>\ldots</tt></A> horizontally at bottom of line
-<li><a href="ltx-207.html"><tt>\cdots</tt></a> horizontally center of line
- (math mode only)
-<li><A href="ltx-218.html"><tt>\ddots</tt></A> diagonal (math mode only)
-<li><A href="ltx-340.html"><tt>\vdots</tt></A> vertical (math mode only)
-</ul>
-
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>,
-<A href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</A>.<br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 25 April 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/emph.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/emph.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 66153686893..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/emph.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,24 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \emph</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\emph</font></h1>
-This is LaTeX2e.
-<p>
-The <tt>\emph</tt> command is considered more
-suitable for short stretches of emphasized text.
-Like the LaTeX 2.09 <a href="ltx-221.html"><tt>\em</tt></a> command
-it toggles between italics and Roman typefaces.
-A typical use would be
-<pre>
- <tt>This is \emph{emphasized text}.</tt>
-</pre>
-<hr>
-See also <a href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</a>,
- <a href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</a><br>
-Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<address>
-<hr>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 11 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ensuremath.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ensuremath.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 10f0dea1611..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ensuremath.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,23 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX2e \ensuremath</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\ensuremath (<strong>LaTeX2e</strong>)</font></h1>
-<tt>\ensuremath{Text set in math mode}</tt>
-<p>
-The argument of the <tt>\ensuremath</tt> command is always set in
-math mode, regardless of the current mode. Note that math mode
-is <strong>not</strong> specifically invoked in the argument of
-the <tt>\ensuremath</tt> command.
-<p>
-Thus <tt>\ensuremath{$\alpha^2+\beta^2$}</tt> is <strong>not
-correct</strong>.<br>
-The <strong>correct</strong> form is <tt>\ensuremath{\alpha^2+\beta^2}</tt>.
-<p>
-See also <a href="ltx-18.html"><tt>\newcommand</tt></a>
-<hr>
-Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a><br>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 4 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body></html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/externals.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/externals.html
deleted file mode 100644
index d1cbde94b8a..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/externals.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,189 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Other On-line LaTeX Information</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Other on-line LaTeX information</font></h1>
-
-<hr>
-
-<h2>Prime Sources</h2>
-<dl>
- <dt><b><big><a href="http://www.tug.org/">TeX Users Group Home
- Page</a></big></b>
- <!-- link verified 1998-05-21 -->
-
- <dt><b><big>The Comprehensive Tex Archive Network (CTAN)</big></b>
- <dd>Virtually all TeX, LaTeX, and related software and documentation can
- be obtained from CTAN, which has multiple ftp mirror sites.
- See for example these
- <a href="http://ctan.tug.org/ctan/">US</a> and
- <!-- link verified 1998-05-14 -->
- <a href="http://www.tex.ac.uk/">UK</a> sites.
- <!-- link verified 1998-05-14 -->
-
- <dt><b><big><a href="http://www.tex.ac.uk/ctan/latex/">LaTeX
- home page</a></big></b>
- <dd>Doesn't seem to have been updated since 1994.
- <!-- link verified 1998-05-21 -->
-
-</dl>
-
-<hr>
-
-<H2>Packages for Publications</H2>
-<dl>
- <dt><b><big>REVTeX</big></b>
- <dd>The <a href="http://www.aip.org/">American Institute of Physics</a>
- accepts manuscripts for several of its journals in
- <a href="http://www.aip.org/aip/pubserv.html">REVTeX</a>.
- <!-- link verified 1998-05-14 -->
-
- <dt><b><big>AASTeX</big></b>
- <dd>Similarly, the <a href="http://aas.org/">American Astronomical Society</a>
- accepts manuscripts for several of its journals in
- <a href="http://www.aas.org/publications/aastex/">AASTeX</a>.
- <!-- link verified 1998-05-14 -->
-
- The <a href="ftp://aas.org/pubs/aastex-misc/FAQ">AASTeX FAQ</a>
- might be helpful.
- <!-- link verified 1998-05-14 -->
-
- Astronomers will also find
- <a href="http://www.stsci.edu/software/TeX.html">TeX and LaTeX Macros
- for astronomers</a> from STScI to be useful;
- Particularly good is Chris Biemesderfer's
- <a href="http://www.stsci.edu/ftp/software/tex/ltxcrib/">LaTeX
- Command Summary</a>.
- <!-- link verified 1998-05-14 -->
-
- <dt><b><big>AMSTeX</big></b>
- <dd>The <a href="http://www.ams.org/">American Mathematical Society</a>
- has their own macro package,
- <a href="http://www.ams.org/tex/home.html">AMSTeX</a>.
- <!-- link verified 1998-05-14 -->
-
-</dl>
-
-
-
-
-
-<hr>
-
-<h2>More Resources and Links</h2>
-
-
-<p>The UK TeX Users' Group's
-<a href="http://www.cogs.susx.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?introduction=yes">FAQ
-Page</a> is searchable and up-to-date.</p>
- <!-- link verified 1998-05-14 -->
-
-
-<p><a href="http://www.emerson.emory.edu/services/latex/latex2e/latex2e_toc.html">LaTeXe help 1.4</a>
-is available from Emory Univ.</p>
- <!-- link verified 1998-05-14 -->
-
-
-<p><a href="http://www.cis.ohio-state.edu/~gurari/TeX4ht/mn.html">TeX4ht:
-TeX and LaTeX for Hypertext</a>
-is available from Ohio State.</p>
- <!-- link verified 1998-05-14 -->
-
-
-<p><a href="http://www.am.qub.ac.uk/latex/latex_1.html">Hypertext information
-similar to the current set of files</a> also originated from VMS
-help files.</p>
-
-<p><a href="http://stkwww.fys.ruu.nl:8000/posters/hogeveen/recommend/astdoc.html">Aspects of publishing with TeX and LaTeX</a>
-is an introduction to the philosophy of TeX and LaTeX.</p>
- <!-- link verified 1998-05-21 -->
-
-<p><a href="http://club.eng.cam.ac.uk/help/tpl/textprocessing/LaTeX_intro.html">Text Processing Using LaTeX</a>
-from Cambridge Univ. Engineering Dept. includes excellent beginning
-and advanced hypertext manuals as well as information in other formats.</p>
- <!-- link verified 1998-05-21 -->
-
-<p>Macintosh users will want to take a look at Gary Gray's
-<a href="http://www.esm.psu.edu/mac-tex/">TeX/LaTeX Software for the
-Macintosh</a>, with pointers to many tools for dealing with LaTeX
-and what's new listings.</p>
- <!-- link verified 1998-05-21 -->
-
-<p>For those with less experience with LaTeX, good introductory material
-includes:</p>
-
-<ul>
- <li><A href="http://riceinfo.rice.edu/Computer/Documents/Classes/Unix/class/class.html">
- Intro to LaTeX</a>,
- a short course at Rice University.
- <!-- link verified 1998-05-21 -->
-
- <li><a href="http://www.maths.tcd.ie/~dwilkins/LaTeXPrimer/Index.html">Getting
- Started with LaTeX</a> by David Wilkins, Trinity College, Dublin.
- <!-- link verified 1998-05-21 -->
-
- <li><a href="http://zen.efs.mq.edu.au/doc/LatexTutorial/LatexTutorial.html">LaTeX Tutorial</a> from Macquarie University.
- <!-- link verified 1998-05-21 -->
-
- <li><a href="http://www.cs.stir.ac.uk/guides/latex/guide.html">Document
- Preparation with LaTeX</a> from the Univ. of Sterling, UK.
- <!-- link verified 1998-05-21 -->
-
-</ul>
-
-
-
-
-
-
-<p>The <a href="http://www.loria.fr/services/tex/">(La)TeX navigator</a>
-from LORIA in France is an excellent source of documentation and pointers
-to other resources. The site is also in available in
-<a href="http://www.loria.fr/services/tex/english/index.html">English</a> and
-<a href="http://www.loria.fr/services/tex/german/index.html">Deutsch</a>.</p>
- <!-- link verified 1998-05-21 -->
-
-<p>Lots of
-<a href="http://www.cs.csubak.edu/Doc/Tex/welcome.html">documentation</a>,
-mostly PostScript, is available from King Lee at Cal State-Bakersfield.</p>
- <!-- link verified 1998-05-21 -->
-
-<p><a href="http://www.stat.ucla.edu/develop/tex/index.html">TeX
-and Friends</a>, from UCLA, is mostly (compressed) PostScript files.</p>
- <!-- link verified 1998-05-21 -->
-
-<p><a href="http://www.cl.cam.ac.uk/TeXdoc/TeXdocs.html">Tex-related
-documents</a> from Cambridge Univ.; includes TeX Users Group newsletter
-and many documents (mostly in dvi format).</p>
- <!-- link verified 1998-05-21 -->
-
-
-
-
-<p>The Usenet newsgroup
-<b><a href="news:comp.text.tex">comp.text.tex</a></b> can be a good
-source of information and help (but read the FAQ before posting).</p>
-
-<p>Of course, there's always
-<a href="http://www.yahoo.com/Computers_and_Internet/Desktop_Publishing/TeX/">Yahoo</a>.</p>
- <!-- link verified 1998-05-14 -->
-
-
-
-
-
-
-<hr>
-
-Go back to the <a href="index.html">Introduction</a><br>
-Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a><br>
-
-<hr>
-
-<address>
-Links verified: RBS, 1998-05-14, 05-21<br>
-</address>
-
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/fonts2e.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/fonts2e.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 1bc6a6108cf..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/fonts2e.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,51 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX2e Font Selection</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Font Selection (LaTeX2e)</font></h1>
-The following methods for font selection may
-<strong>not</strong> be used in math mode.
-<p>
-Type styles are specified by three <em>independent</em> components. If
-a font (the combination of these three components) is chosen which is
-not available, LaTeX will issue a warning and substitute a similar font.
-<p>
-<ul>
-<li>series
-<li>family
-<li>shape
-</ul>
-These may be chosen by either a command so that the choice applies
-to the text within the command argument, or by a
-<a href="declarations.html">declaration</a> which obeys the usual
-rules for scope. The two forms are
-<pre>
- <strong>declaration</strong> <strong>command</strong>
-
- \mdseries \textmd Medium Series
- \bfseries \textbf Boldface Series
-
- \rmfamily \textrm Roman Family
- \sffamily \textsf Sans Serif Family
- \ttfamily \texttt Typewrite Family
-
- \upshape \textup Upright Shape
- \itshape \textit Italic Shape
- \slshape \textsl Slanted Shape
- \scshape \textsc Small Caps Shape
- \normalfont \textnormal Normal Style
-</pre>
-The <tt>\normalfont</tt> declaration sets series, family, and shape to
-the main text font of the document.
-<p>
-When using the Typewriter Family, words will be hyphenated only where
-permitted by a <tt><a href="ltx-182.html">\-</a></tt> command.
-<hr>
-See also Typeface <a href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</a><br>
-See also <a href="mathfonts.html">Math fonts and styles</a><br>
-Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 19 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/fragile.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/fragile.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 5252c66ffa7..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/fragile.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,59 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX fragile commands</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Fragile and Robust commands</font></h1>
-LaTeX commands are either <em>robust</em> or <em>fragile</em>. Fragile
-commands need special care <em>if they are part of a moving argument</em>.
-<p>
-Arguments to some LaTeX commands are called <em>moving arguments</em> because
-they may be "moved" to other places in the document. For example, the argument
-of <a href="ltx-141.html">Sectioning comands</a> may be moved
-to the <a href="ltx-170.html">Table of Contents</a>. Other examples
-of moving arguments include:
-<ul>
-<li>arguments of <a href="caption.html"><tt>\caption</tt></a> commands
-<li>terminal input and output, <a href="ltx-174.html"><tt>\typeout</tt></a>
- and <a href="ltx-175.html"><tt>\typein</tt></a>
-<li>commands that <a href="ltx-264.html">produce page headings</a>
-<li>the <a href="ltx-91.html">Letter Environment</a>
-<li>the <a href="ltx-324.html"><tt>\thanks</tt></a> command
-<li> an <tt>@</tt> expression in the <a href="ltx-202.html">Array</a> or
- <a href="ltx-68.html">Tabular</a> environment
-</ul>
-A fragile command that appears in a moving argument must be preceded by a
-<tt>\protect</tt> command. The <tt>\protect</tt> applies only to the
-immediately following command; if arguments of this command also contain
-fragile commands, the latter must be protected with their own <tt>\protect</tt>.
-
-<h2>Some fragile commands</h2>
-The following list is not exhaustive, but illustrates the kind of commands
-which are fragile
-<ul>
-<li>All commands that have an optional argument are fragile.
-<li>Environments delimited by <tt>\begin ... \end</tt> are fragile.
-<li><a href="ltx-421.html">Display math</a> environment delimited by
- <tt>\[ ... \]</tt>
-<li><a href="ltx-115.html">Math environment</a> <tt>\( ... \)</tt>
- <ul><li>However, <tt>$ ... $</tt> is robust</ul>
-<li>Line breaks, <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a>
-<li><a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a> commands
-<li><a href="ltx-231.html"><tt>\footnote</tt></a> commands
-</ul>
-
-<h2>Some robust commands</h2>
-In general, commands which change <a href="ltx-176.html">Type face or
-Type style</a> are robust.
-<p>
-<a href="ltx-86.html">Length commands</a> are robust and should
-<strong>not</strong> be preceded by a <tt>\protect</tt> command. Nor
-should a <tt>\protect</tt> command be used in the argument to
-<a href="ltx-195.html"><tt>\addtocounter</tt></a> or
-<a href="ltx-310.html"><tt>\setcounter</tt></a> command.
-<hr>
-Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Sep 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/frenchsp.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/frenchsp.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 222bd8b8452..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/frenchsp.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,16 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \frenchspacing</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\frenchspacing</font></h1>
-The <tt>\frenchspacing</tt> <a href="declarations.html">declaration</a>
-tells LaTeX <strong>not</strong> to insert extra space at the end of
-sentences. This style is common in non-English languages.
-<hr>
-See also <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jun 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/index.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/index.html
deleted file mode 100644
index cf271375d3d..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/index.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,98 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head>
-<title>Hypertext Help with LaTeX</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff"
-text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-
-<h1><font color="#cc0000">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font></h1>
-
-<p>LaTeX is a word processing (or, more accurately, a typesetting)
-program. It typesets a file of text using the TeX program and
-the LaTeX Macro package for TeX. It does this by processing an
-input file containing the text of a document with interspersed
-commands that describe how the text should be formatted.</p>
-
-<p>Unike many word processing programs, which concentrate on formatting
-material on the page (often called WYSIWYG, for "what you see is what
-you get"), LaTeX concentrates on "content."
-LaTeX is a Generalized Mark-up Language macro package for the TeX
-typesetting program. That is, one specifies
-the structure: sections, title, appendix, authors' names, etc.,
-which bear little relation to how this will look on a page.
-That is determined by the
-<a href="ltx-22.html">document style</a>
-files (*.sty);
-standard ones are provided for such things as articles, reports,
-books, and letters. However, these style files may be readily replaced
-by others, giving a completely different look.
-Of course, it is possible in LaTeX to specify much about
-the physical layout, but this tends
-to be done with commands that define things like space between lines or
-amount to indent paragraphs rather than by positioning each piece of text
-on the page as is typical in WYSIWYG systems.</p>
-
-<p>LaTeX produces
-as output a Device Independent (*.dvi) file that contains
-commands that can be translated into commands for a variety of output
-devices. It also produces a transcript or log (*.log) file
-that contains summary
-information and diagnostic messages for any errors discovered in the
-input file and an auxiliary (*.aux) file which contains cross
-refererence information for Tables, citations, etc. It is sometimes
-necessary to run LaTeX twice so that it has correct cross reference
-information, especially when modifications have changed the numbering.</p>
-
-<p>These hypertext help files are meant to provide reference information
-for those with some familiarity with LaTeX. They are not an introduction
-or tutorial.</p>
-
-
-<dl>
- <dt><big><b><a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a></b></big>
- <dd>Links to help by subject, LaTeX command, or environment
- <p></p>
-
- <dt><big><b><a href="versions.html">Notes on Versions</a></b></big>
- <dd>LaTeX 2.09 and LaTeX2e
- <p></p>
-
- <dt><big><b><a href="refs.html">Reference Books</a></b></big>
- <p></p>
-
- <dt><big><b><a href="LaTeX-info.html">About these files</a></b></big>
- <dd>Plus info on how to obtain them via ftp
- <p></p>
-
- <dt><big><b><a href="externals.html">LaTeX resources on the Web</a></b></big>
- <dd>Including REVTeX, AMSTeX, and AASTeX
- <p></p>
-
- <dt><big><b><a href="mirror.html">Mirrors of this site</a></b></big>
- <dd>Copies of these files which might provide faster access
- <p></p>
-
-</ul>
-
-
-<p>&nbsp;</p>
-
-
-<p>These pages were originally created by
-<a href="http://www.giss.nasa.gov/staff/sgreen/">Sheldon Green</a>,
-who passed away in December 1995.
-Updates subsequent to Dr. Green's death have been made only for
-purposes of page formatting and link verification.
-Please contact
-<a href="mailto:webmaster@giss.nasa.gov">webmaster@giss.nasa.gov</a>
-if you are interested in assisting with maintenance and updates to
-these pages.</p>
-
-<hr>
-
-<address>
-Updated: 1998-12-03, RBS
-</address>
-
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/input.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/input.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 4246ee64946..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/input.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,95 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head>
-<title>Input to LaTeX</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Input to LaTeX</font></h1>
-Input to LaTeX is plain text (ascii) which includes both the text of the
-document and also formatting commands. It is possible to
-<a href="ltx-165.html">split the input</a> into several files using:
-<ul>
-<li><a href="ltx-245.html"><tt>\include</tt></a>
-<li><a href="ltx-248.html"><tt>\input</tt></a>
-</ul>
-<p>
-Space characters separate words. Two space characters in a row are
-equivalent to a single space character. The end of line is also
-equivalent to a space character. (However, a percent sign,
-<a href="ltx-434.html"><tt>%</tt></a>, can end a line without
-generating a space character.) Generally, space characters at the beginning
-of a line are ignored.
-<p>
-An empty or blank line between two lines of text defines
-<a href="ltx-111.html">a new paragraph</a>.
-Two blank lines are equivalent to one.
-<h2>Special Characters</h2>
-The following ten characters are <a href="ltx-164.html">Special LaTeX
-Characters</a>:
-<pre><tt> $ & % # _ { } ~ ^ \ </tt>
-</pre>
-If entered directly in the input they cause LaTeX to do something special.
-You can get the following seven of them into your document by simply
-preceding them with a backslash (<tt>\</tt>):
-<pre><tt> $ & % # _ { } </tt>
-</pre>
-To get the other three (<tt> ~ ^ \ </tt>) in
-your output requires <a href="ltx-164.html">more work</a>.
-
-<h2>LaTex Commands</h2>
-Commands take one of two forms
-<ul><li>a backslash (<tt>\</tt>) followed by a single special character
- <li>a bacslash (<tt>\</tt>) followed by a string of letters
-</ul>
-The second case is case-sensitive;
-<a href="ltx-405.html"><tt>\Gamma</tt></a> is different from
-<a href="ltx-405.html"><tt>\gamma</tt></a>.
-These commands are terminated by a nonletter, i.e., a blank, a number,
-a punctuation mark or special character.
-<p>
-Commands may have mandatory arguments, which are input in braces
-(<tt>{}</tt>).
-They may also have optional arguments, which are input in square brackets
-(<tt>[]</tt>).
-<p>
-For commands which produce text a trailing blank may be interpreted as the
-end of the command, which does not automatically create a space, so
- you may have to do something to create an
-<a href="ltx-431.html">interword space</a> after this text.
-
-<h2><a name="structure">Structure of Input</a></h2>
-LaTeX input normally begins with a
-<a href="ltx-22.html"><tt>\documentstyle</tt></a> command. (In LaTeX2e
-this is replaced with a <a href="versions.html"><tt>\documentclass</tt></a>
-command.)
-<p>
-The beginning of the document text follows a <tt>\begin{document}</tt>
-command.
-<p>
-Input between the <tt>\documentstyle</tt> and <tt>\begin{document}</tt>
-is called the <em>preamble</em> and typically contains <a href="ltx-17.html">new
-command definitions</a>, information for the
-<a href="ltx-263.html">title</a>, <a href="declarations.html">declarations</a>
-which affect things like <a href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</a>, etc.
-<p>
-The document text (and generally also the LaTeX input) is terminated by a
-<tt>\end{document}</tt> command.
-<p>
-It is possible to obtain some of the input from <a href="ltx-165.html">external
-files</a>, i.e., those which are not the main file input to the LaTeX program.
-<hr>
-See also
-<ul>
-<li><a href="ltx-165.html">Splitting the input</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-164.html">Special Characters</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-111.html">Making Paragraphs</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a>
-</ul>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 30 Oct 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/item.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/item.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 634cf6ae42f..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/item.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,30 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \item</title>
-</head><body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\item</font></h1>
-<tt>\item[label] Text for this item</tt>
-<p>
-The <tt>\item</tt> command starts a new item in a
-<a href="lists.html">List Environment</a>. The optional argument
-<tt>label</tt> generates the item label; if not given a default
-label is used.
-<p>
-A blank line preceding an <tt>\item</tt> command has no effect.
-<p>
-In order to use brackets as part of the <tt>label</tt> (for example,
-in the <a href="ltx-31.html">Description Environment</a>) they must
-be enclosed in braces:
-<pre>
- <tt>\item[{[}item 1{]}] This is the first item</tt>
-</pre>
-The <tt>\item</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>.
-<hr>
-See also <a href="ltx-27.html">Environments</a>,
- <a href="lists.html">Lists</a><br>
-Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/lefteqn.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/lefteqn.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 3e0af56d138..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/lefteqn.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,41 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \lefteqn</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\lefteqn</font></h1>
-<p>
-<p><pre>
- <tt>\lefteqn{eqn}</tt>
-</pre>
- prints <tt>eqn</tt> in display math style, but pretends that it has
- zero width. It is typicaly used within an
- <a href="ltx-223.html"><tt>Eqnarray</tt></a> environment for
- displaying long equations that require multiple lines.
-<p>
-A typical use might be
-<pre>
- <tt>\begin{eqnarray}
- \lefteqn{\int_0^<a href="ltx-407.html">\infty</a> some expression =} \\
- & & some terms <a href="ltx-181.html">\\</a>
- & & <a href="ltx-265.html">\mbox{}</a> + more terms
- \end{eqnarray}</tt>
-</pre>
-Note that the empty <a href="ltx-265.html"><tt>\mbox{}</tt></a> is so LaTeX
-knows that the following <tt>+</tt> is a binary operator, and is not
-attached to the first of the "more terms" as a unary operator.
-<hr>
-Related topics
-<ul>
-<li><A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>
-<li><a href="ltx-202.html">Array Environment</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-223.html">Eqnarray Environment</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-224.html">Equation Environment</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-421.html">Displaymath Environment</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a>
-</ul>
-Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/lists.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/lists.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 4912c395d99..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/lists.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,58 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX Lists</title>
-</head><body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Lists</font></h1>
-LaTeX provides several List-Making Environments
-These may be nested up to four deep.
-<p>
-
-<p>The items in the list are given by <a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a>
-commands.
-A blank line before an <tt>\item</tt> command has no effect.
-
-<h2>List-Making Enviroments</h2>
-<DL>
-<dt><h3><a href="ltx-31.html">Description</a></h3>
-<dd>Typically used for giving short definitions or descriptions; the
-<tt>label</tt> argument of the <a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a> command
-generally giving the term being described (although it <strong>can</strong>
-be left blank, it will look strange). The text of the
-<a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a> command is indented.
-
-<dt><h3><a href="ltx-222.html">Enumerate</a></h3>
-<dd>Typically used for numbered lists.
-<a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a> for these lists are
-provided by <tt>enumi, emumii, enumiii, enumiv</tt>, respectively, for the four
-levels of nesting.
-
-<dt><h3><a href="ltx-250.html">Itemize</a></h3>
-<dd>Typically used for unnumbered lists. The default
-<tt>label</tt> argument of the <a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a> command
-produces "tick-marks" which vary by level of nesting, generally
-"bullets" for the first level.
-
-<dt><h3><a href="ltx-260.html">List</a></h3>
-<dd>Produces a list of labeled items and has required arguments that
-allow a great deal of flexibility in layout. It is generally used
-to define new environments with the
-<a href="ltx-19.html"><tt>\newenvironment</tt></a> command, or to
-set up one-of-a-kind lists.
-
-<dt><h3><a href="trivlist.html">Trivlist</a></h3>
-<dd>Like the List Environment, using the currently defined values of
-list-making parameters; normally used to define an environment with a
-single item, with an <a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a> command
-as part of the environment definition.
-
-</DL>
-<hr>
-See also <a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a><br>
-See also <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a>,
-<a href="ltx-27.html">Environments</a><br>
-Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 18 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-111.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-111.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 56c6c8bb6be..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-111.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,25 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX Making Paragraphs</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Making Paragraphs</font></h1>
-<p>
- A paragraph is ended by one or more completely blank lines -- lines
- not containing even a <a href="ltx-434.html"><tt>%</tt></a> (comments).
- A blank line should not appear where a new
- paragraph cannot be started, such as in math mode or in the argument
- of a sectioning command.
-
-<H2>Subtopics</H2>
-<ul>
-<li><A href="ltx-247.html">\indent</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-280.html">\noindent</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-293.html">\par</A>
-</ul>
-<hr>
-Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 10 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-115.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-115.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 539ef71c2a0..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-115.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,82 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX Math Formulas</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Math Formulas</font></h1>
-<p>
- There are four environments that put LaTeX in math mode:
-<ul><li><a href="#math">math</a> (see below)
- <li><a href="ltx-421.html">displaymath</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-223.html">eqnarray</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-224.html">equation</a>
-</ul>
- All four of these environments are typeset in math
- <a href="ltx-130.html">mode</a>, using a math italic font and LaTeX
- ideas about spacing in math mode. (See also <a href="mathfonts.html">math
- fonts and styles</a>.)
-<p>
- The math environment is for formulas that
- appear right in the text. The displaymath, eqnarray, and equation
- environments are for formulas that apppear on their own line(s).
- The math environment can be used in both paragraph and LR mode, but
- displaymath, eqnarray, and equation environments can be used only
- in paragraph mode.
-
-<h2><a name="math">Math environment</a></h2>
- The math environment may be specified, as with all environments, by
-<pre>
- <tt>\begin{math} math equation \end{math}</tt>
-</pre>
- However, it is used so often that it has two equivalent shorter forms:
-<pre>
- <tt>\( math equation \)</tt>
-</pre>
-or just
-<pre>
- <tt>$ math equation $</tt>
-</pre>
-In <a href="versions.html">LaTeX2e</a> one can also use
-<pre>
- <tt><a href="ensuremath.html">\ensuremath</a>{math equation}</tt>
-</pre>
-<p>
-For example,
-<a href="ltx-179.html">Subscripts</a> and
-<a href="ltx-180.html">superscripts</a> can only be used in math
-mode. To include these in running text one could use:
-<pre>
- <tt>The formula for water is H$_2$O.
- If the hypotenuse is $c$, then $c^2=a^2+b^2$.</tt>
-</pre>
-Note that it is standard to use math mode for letters, such as the
-the <tt>$c$</tt> above, which are math variables.
-<hr>
-<h2>Related topics</H2>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="ltx-421.html">Displaymath environment</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-223.html">Eqnarray environment</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-224.html">Equation environment</a>
-<p>
-<li><a href="ltx-130.html">LaTeX Modes</a>
-<p>
-<li><a href="mathfonts.html">Math fonts and styles</a>
-<li><A href="ltx-179.html">Subscripts</A> and
- <a href="ltx-180.html">Superscripts</a>
-<li><A href="ltx-117.html">Math Symbols</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-118.html">Spacing in Math Mode</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</A>
-<li><a href="ellipses.html">Ellipses</a>
-<p>
-<li><a href="boldmath.html"><tt>\boldmath</tt></a> for a bold math font
-<li><a href="ltx-235.html"><tt>\frac</tt></a> for generating built-up fractions
-<li><a href="stackrel.html"><tt>\stackrel</tt></a> for putting things above
- each other
-<li><a href="ltx-319.html"><tt>\sqrt</tt></a> for square (and nth) roots
-</ul>
-<p>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 31 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-117.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-117.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 761ec951f03..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-117.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,45 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX Math Symbols</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Math Symbols</font></h1>
-<p>
- TeX provides almost any mathematical symbol you're likely to need.
-<p>
- Some, like <tt>+ - = &lt; &gt; | </tt> are obtained from the keyboard (the
- first three can be used in any mode; the last three only in math mode).
-<p>
- Others are generated by LaTeX commands and
- can generally be used only in math mode.
- The following describe some of the useful symbols
-<ul>
- <li><a href="ltx-401.html#math">Accents</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-406.html">Arrows</a> (math mode)
- <li><a href="ltx-404.html">Binary and relational operators</a> (math mode)
- <li><a href="ltx-403.html">Delimiters</a> (parenthesis-like objects; math mode)
- <li><a href="ltx-405.html">Greek letters</a> (math mode)
- <li><a href="ltx-407.html">Miscellaneous symbols</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-409.html">Math functions</a> (sin, cos, log, ... ; math mode)
- <li><a href="ltx-408.html">Variable size math symbols</a> (sums, integrals, ...
- ; math mode)
-<p>
- <li><a href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</a>
-<p>
- <li><a href="ltx-235.html"><tt>\frac</tt></a> generates fractions (math mode)
- <li><a href="ltx-319.html"><tt>\sqrt</tt></a> generates n-th root symbol
- (math mode)
- <li><a href="stackrel.html"><tt>\stackrel</tt></a> places one item above
- another (math mode)
-<p>
- <li><a href="boldmath.html"><tt>\boldmath</tt></a> for a bold math font
-</ul>
-
-<hr>
-See also <a href="mathfonts.html">Math Fonts and Styles</a><br>
-Go to <a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a><br>
-Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jul 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-118.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-118.html
deleted file mode 100644
index bd64652c6ee..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-118.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,25 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX Spacing in Math Mode</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Spacing in Math Mode</font></h1>
-<p>
- In a math environment, LaTeX ignores the spaces you type and puts in
- the spacing that it thinks is best. LaTeX formats mathematics the way
- it's done in mathematics texts. If you want different spacing, LaTeX
- provides the following four commands for use in math mode:
-<ul>
-<li><a href="ltx-183.html"><tt>\;</tt></a> - a thick space
-<li><a href="ltx-184.html"><tt>\:</tt></a> - a medium space
-<li><a href="ltx-185.html"><tt>\,</tt></a> - a thin space
-<li><a href="ltx-186.html"><tt>\!</tt></a> - a negative thin space
-</ul>
-<hr>
-See also <a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a>,
- <a href="ltx-117.html">Math Symbols</a><br>
-Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a><br>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 7 Jul 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-119.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-119.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 9e0fb80d330..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-119.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,39 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX Math Miscellany</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Math Miscellany</font></h1>
-
-The math symbols <tt>&lt; &gt;</tt> and <tt>|</tt> are used only in math mode.
-Note that left and right angle brackets (which are somewhat taller than
-&lt; and &gt;) can be obtained with
-<a href="ltx-403.html"><tt>\langle</tt> and <tt>\rangle</tt></a> commands.
-<p>
-The single right quotation mark, <tt>'</tt>, produces a prime in math mode.
-You can also use <a href="ltx-407.html"><tt>\prime</tt></a>.
-
-<H2>Also see</H2>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="boldmath.html"><tt>\boldmath</tt></a> font
-<li><A href="ltx-207.html"><tt>\cdots</tt></A> (centered ellipsis)
-<li><A href="ltx-218.html"><tt>\ddots</tt></A> (diagonal ellipsis)
-<li><A href="ltx-235.html"><tt>\frac</tt></A>
-<li><A href="ltx-256.html"><tt>\ldots</tt></A> (ellipsis)
-<li><A href="ltx-287.html"><tt>\overbrace</tt></A>
-<li><A href="ltx-288.html"><tt>\overline</tt></A>
-<li><A href="ltx-319.html"><tt>\sqrt</tt></A>
-<li><a href="stackrel.html"><tt>\stackrel</tt></a> putting
- things above other things
-<li><A href="ltx-335.html"><tt>\underbrace</tt></A>
-<li><A href="ltx-336.html"><tt>\underline</tt></A>
-<li><A href="ltx-340.html"><tt>\vdots</tt></A> (vertical ellipsis)
-</ul>
-<hr>
-See also <a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a>,
- <a href="ltx-117.html">Math Symbols</a>,
- <a href="mathfonts.html">Math Fonts and Styles</a><br>
-Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jul 1995.
-</address>
-</body></html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-13.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-13.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 75e5148ba52..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-13.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,62 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX Cross References</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Cross References</font></h1>
-<p>
- One reason for numbering things like figures and equations is to refer
- the reader to them, as in "See Figure 3 for more details."
-
-<H2>Sections, Equations, Tables, etc.</H2>
-One can generate numbered references to anything for which LaTeX
-maintains a <a href="ltx-3.html">counter</a> by placing a
-<a href="ltx-252.html"><tt>\label</tt></a> command
-with some mnemonic name in the appropriate
-<a href="ltx-27.html">environment</a>. The reference is then generated
-by use of the <A href="ltx-303.html"><tt>\ref</tt></A> command with the
-same mnemonic.
-<p>
-For example
-<pre>
- <tt>\begin{equation}
- <A href="ltx-252.html">\label</a>{eqno1}
- c <a href="ltx-404.html">\geq</a> <a href="ltx-319.html">\sqrt</a>{a^2+b^2+1}
- \end{equation}
- .... intervening text ...
- From Eq.~(<A href="ltx-303.html">\ref</a>{eqno1}) we see ...</tt>
-</pre>
-Assuming that this is the first equation,
-the last line will produce "From Eq. (1) we see ..." Note the
-use of the <a href="ltx-143.html"><tt>~</tt></a>
-to ensure that there is no line break between "Eq." and "(1)."
-Also note that the <tt>\ref</tt> command produces only the number;
-if you want the number to be in parentheses (as shown here) you have
-to include them in your text.
-
-<h2>Bibliographic citations</h2>
-Bibliographic citations work somewhat differently. The following
-should be consulted:
-<ul>
-<li><a href="ltx-211.html"><tt>\cite</tt></a>
-<li><a href="ltx-73.html"><tt>\thebibligraphy</tt></a>
-</ul>
-<hr>
-See also
-<ul>
-<li><A href="ltx-252.html"><tt>\label</tt></A>
-<li><A href="ltx-303.html"><tt>\ref</tt></A>
-<li><A href="ltx-291.html"><tt>\pageref</tt></A>
-<p>
-<li><a href="ltx-211.html"><tt>\cite</tt></a>
-<li><a href="ltx-73.html"><tt>\thebibligraphy</tt></a>
-<p>
-<li><a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-27.html">Environments</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-141.html">Sectioning</a>
-</ul>
-Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a><br>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 03 Nov 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-130.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-130.html
deleted file mode 100644
index d6a99f89d07..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-130.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,67 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX Modes</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Modes</font></h1>
-<p>
- When LaTeX is processing your input text, it is always in one of three
- modes:
-<ul>
- <li><I>Paragraph</I> mode
- <li><I>Math</I> mode
- <li><I>Left-to-right</I> mode, called LR mode for short
-</ul>
-
- LaTeX changes mode only when it goes up or down a staircase to a
- different level, though not all level changes produce mode changes.
- Mode changes occur only when entering or leaving an environment, or
- when LaTeX is processing the argument of certain text-producing
- commands.
-<h2>Paragraph mode</h2>
- Paragraph mode is the most common; it's the one LaTeX is in when
- processing ordinary text. In that mode, LaTeX breaks your text into
- lines and breaks the lines into pages.
-<p>
- There
- are also several text-producing commands and environments for making a
- box that put LaTeX in paragraph mode. The box made by one of these
- commands or environments will be called a
- <a href="ltx-294.html">parbox</a>. When LaTeX is in
- paragraph mode while making a box, it is said to be in inner paragraph
- mode. The normal paragraph mode, in which LaTeX starts out, is called
- outer paragraph mode.
-
-<h2>Math mode</h2>
- LaTeX is in math mode when it's generating a mathematical formula. It is
- in math mode in the <a href="ltx-115.html#math">math</a>,
- <a href="ltx-421.html">displaymath</a>, <a href="ltx-224.html">equation</a>,
- and <a href="ltx-223.html"> eqnarray</a> environments.
-<p>
- In math mode letters are assumed to be math symbols and spaced accordingly.
- Spaces in the input are ignored, except that spaces may be needed to
- delineate the end of commands.
-
-<h2>LR mode</h2>
- In LR mode, as in paragraph
- mode, LaTeX considers the output that it produces to be a string of
- words with spaces between them. In LR mode, unlike paragraph and math modes,
- spaces are not ignored; an input space creates an output space.
- However, unlike paragraph mode, LaTeX
- keeps going from left to right; it never starts a new line in LR mode.
- Even if you put a hundred words into an
- <a href="ltx-265.html"><tt>\mbox</tt></a>, LaTeX would keep
- typesetting them from left to right inside a single box, and then
- complain because the resulting box was too wide to fit on the line.
-<p>
- LaTeX is in LR mode when it starts making a box with an
- <a href="ltx-265.html"><tt>\mbox</tt></a> command.
- You can get it to enter a different mode inside the box - for example,
- you can make it enter math mode to put a formula in the box.
-<hr>
-Also see <a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a><br>
-Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a><br>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 31 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-131.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-131.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 70e27e88524..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-131.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,24 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX Page Styles</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Page Styles</font></h1>
-<p>
- The <tt>\documentstyle</tt> command determines the size and position of the
- page's head and foot. The page style determines what goes in them.
-
-<H2>Subtopics</H2>
-<ul>
-<li><A href="ltx-263.html"><tt>\maketitle</tt></A>
-<li><A href="ltx-137.html"><tt>\pagenumbering</tt></A>
-<li><A href="ltx-138.html"><tt>\pagestyle</tt></A>
-<li><A href="ltx-140.html"><tt>\thispagestyle</tt></A>
-<li><a href="ltx-329.html"><tt>\title</tt></a>
-</ul>
-<hr>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 17 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-137.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-137.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 59134f72b88..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-137.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,30 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \pagenumbering</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\pagenumbering</font></h1>
-<p>
- <tt>\pagenumbering{num_style}</tt>
-<p>
-
- Specifies the style of page numbers. Possible values of num_style are:
-<p>
-
-<ul>
-<li><TT>arabic</TT> Arabic numerals
-<li><TT>roman</TT> Lowercase roman numerals
-<li><TT>Roman</TT> Uppercase roman numerals
-<li><TT>alph</TT> Lowercase letters
-<li><TT>Alph</TT> Uppercase letters
-</ul>
-<hr>
-See also <a href="ltx-131.html">Page Styles</a><br>
-For page numbering, see <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a><br>
-To refer to a page number in the text, see
- <a href="ltx-291.html"><tt>\pageref</tt></a><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 20 Oct 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-138.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-138.html
deleted file mode 100644
index cd6fd4b67c7..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-138.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,31 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \pagestyle</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\pagestyle</font></h1>
- <tt>\pagestyle{option}</tt>
-<p>
- The <tt>\pagestyle</tt> <a href="declarations.html">declaration</a>
- changes the style from the current page on
- throughout the remainder of your document.
-<p>
- The valid options are:
-<ul>
-<li><TT>plain</TT> Just a plain page number.
-<li><TT>empty</TT> Produces empty heads and feet - no page numbers.
-<li><TT>headings</TT> Puts running headings on each page. The document
- style specifies what goes in the headings.
-<li><TT>myheadings</TT> You specify what is to go in the heading with the
- <tt>\markboth</tt> or the <tt>\markright</tt> commands.
-</ul>
-<hr>
-See also
-<A href="ltx-264.html"><tt>\markboth</tt> and
- <tt>\markright</tt></A><br>
-See also <a href="ltx-131.html">Page Styles</a><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-140.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-140.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 14882e118a0..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-140.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,20 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \thispagestyle</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\thispagestyle</font></h1>
-<p>
- <tt>\thispagestyle{option}</tt>
-<p>
- The <tt>\thispagestyle</tt> command works in the same manner as the
- <a href="ltx-138.html"><tt>\pagestyle</tt></a>
- command except that it changes the style for the current page only.
-<hr>
-See also <a href="ltx-131.html">Page Styles</a><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 17 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-141.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-141.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 41f2a04db26..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-141.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,70 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX Sectioning</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Sectioning</font></h1>
-<p>
- Sectioning commands provide the means to structure your text into
- units. The <a href="ltx-22.html">document style</a> determines which
- sectioning commands are supported. They should be used with the
- following heirarchy:
- <ul>
- <li><tt>\part</tt>
- <li><tt>\chapter</tt> (report style only)
- <li><tt>\section</tt>
- <li><tt>\subsection</tt>
- <li><tt>\subsubsection</tt>
- <li><tt>\paragraph</tt>
- <li><tt>\subparagraph</tt>
- <li><tt>\subsubparagraph</tt> (milstd and book-form styles only)
- <li><tt>\subsubsubparagraph</tt> (milstd and book-form styles only)
- </ul>
-<p>
- The <a href="ltx-3.html">counter</a> for each level is reset when the
- level above is incremented (except chapters are numbered sequentially
- regardless of the part).
-<p>
- All sectioning commands take the same general form:
-<pre>
- <tt>\chapter[optional]{title}</tt>
- <a href="ltx-252.html">\label{lab}</a> <a href="ltx-434.html">%</a> optional, for cross referencing
- text for this unit ...
- ...
-</pre>
- In addition to providing the heading in the text, the mandatory
- argument of the sectioning command can appear in two other places:
-<ol>
- <li>the table of contents
- <li>the running head at the top of the page
-</ol>
- You may not want the same thing to appear in these other two places as
- appears in the text heading. To handle this situation, the sectioning
- commands have an optional argument that provides the text for these
- other two purposes.
-<p>
-The <tt>title</tt> or <tt>optional</tt> title are moving arguments so
-<a href="fragile.html">fragile</a> commands contained in these
-arguments must be protected.
-<p>
- All the sectioning commands have *-forms that print a title, but do not
- print a number with the title and do not incement the relevant
- <a href="ltx-3.html">counter</a> and do not make an entry in the
- <a href="toc.html">table of contents</a>.
-<p>
- A blank line before or after a sectioning command has no effect.
-<hr>
-Related topics
-<ul>
-<li><a href="ltx-252.html"><tt>\label</tt></a>
-<li><A href="ltx-142.html"><tt>\appendix</tt></A>
-</ul>
-<hr>
-See also <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a>,
- <a href="ltx-13.html">Cross References</a><br>
-See also <a href="toc.html">Table of Contents</a><br>
-Back to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 14 Jul 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-142.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-142.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 843f696d7c4..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-142.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,19 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \appendix</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\appendix</font></h1>
- <tt>\appendix</tt>
-<p>
- The <tt>\appendix</tt> command changes the way sectional units are numbered.
- It generates no text. However, <a href="ltx-141.html">section commands</a>
- after the <tt>\appendix</tt> command are numbered accordingly.
-
-<hr>
-Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 30 Oct 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-143.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-143.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 12207070528..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-143.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,149 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head>
-<title>Help On LaTeX Spaces and Boxes</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Spaces and Boxes</font></h1>
-
-<h2>"Visible" Spaces</h2>
-You can generate a "visible" space, generally indicated as a small, squat
-"u," and useful in didactic material by using the
-<a href="ltx-342.html"><tt>\verb</tt></a> command or the
-<a href="ltx-79.html"><tt>verbatim</tt></a> environment.
-
-<h2>Non-breaking Spaces</h2>
-To generate a space where you do not want to allow a break for a new line use a
-<tt>~</tt>. For example,
-<pre>
- <tt>... in Table~2 and Fig.~3 ...</tt>
-</pre>
-
-<h2>Controlling Space in Text</h2>
-
-The ends of words and sentences are marked
-in the input by one or more spaces. LaTeX
-treats multiple spaces as if they were a single space. An end of line
-is also equivalent to a space; however, you can end a line
-<em>without</em> a space by using a
-<a href="ltx-434.html"><tt>%</tt></a> (anything following the
-<tt>%</tt> is considered to be
-a comment). LaTeX generally ignores spaces at the beginning of lines.
-<p>
-Paragraphs are
-delineated by a <em>blank line</em> -- one which does not contain even
-comments (anything following a
-<a href="ltx-434.html"><tt>%</tt></a> until the end of a line is
-a comment). See also the <a href="ltx-293.html"><tt>\par</tt></a>
-command.
-<p>
-LaTeX leaves extra space after punctuation, such as the period which
-ends a sentence,
-but, it uses a very simple rule (periods end sentences unless
-they follow a capital letter) so
-sometimes it needs a little help in determining when
-this is required. (However, see
-<a href="frenchsp.html"><tt>\frenchspacing</tt></a>.)
-Use
-<ul>
-<li><a href="ltx-431.html"><tt>\&lt;space&gt;</tt></a> to create an ordinary
- interword space
-<li><a href="ltx-432.html"><tt>\@</tt></a> before punctuation to force an "end of
- sentence" space
-</ul>
-<p>
-It is sometimes necessary to add a little additional space, such as between
-consecutive single and double <a href="ltx-433.html">quotation marks</a>.
-The <a href="ltx-185.html"><tt>\,</tt></a> command can be used for this purpose.
-<p>
-Also see
-<ul>
-<li><a href="ltx-430.html">Dashes</a>
-<li><a href="ellipses.html">Ellipses</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-433.html">Quotation Marks</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-118.html">Spacing in Math Mode</a>
-</ul>
-
-<h2>Spaces after Commands</h2>
-
-Most LaTeX commands consist of a <tt>\</tt> followed by a string of
-letters. The end of such commands is indicated by a nonletter, i.e.,
-a number, a punctuation mark, a space, or the end of the line. If the
-command produces text and you want a space to follow this text, you cannot
-just leave a space after the command; that space is treated as the
-end-of-command signal and several spaces are equivalent to one in LaTeX.
-To generate a space after a text-producing command you can use
-<a href="ltx-431.html"><tt>\&lt;space&gt;</tt></a>.
-<p>
-For example
-<pre>
- <tt>I wrote this on <a href="ltx-330.html">\today</a> .</tt>
-</pre>
-generates "I wrote this on Jul 7, 1995." Note that the spaces
-between <tt>\today</tt> and the period in the input do not generate
-any space in the output. On the other hand,
-<pre>
- <tt>\today\ was a good day.</tt>
-</pre>
-or
-<pre>
- <tt>\today \ was a good day.</tt>
-</pre>
-will both produce "Jul 7, 1995 was a good day." The
-<a href="ltx-431.html"><tt>\&lt;space&gt;</tt></a>
-here is necessary to produce space between the date and "was."
-<p>
-An alternatative is to use braces to terminate the command. For
-example, <tt>\today{} was ...</tt> is equivalent to the above.
-
-<h3>Invisible commands</h3>
-Some commands do not produce any output text. LaTeX treats these as
-words of zero length and may try to leave spaces both before and
-after this "word" which will generally produce an undesirable gap.
-This can be avoided by attaching these commands directly to the
-preceding word, i.e., leaving no spaces.
-
-<H2>Some commands which create or manipulate space</H2>
-<ul>
-<li><A href="ltx-198.html">\addvspace</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-206.html">\bigskip</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-220.html">\dotfill</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-238.html">\hfill</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-240.html">\hrulefill</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-241.html">\hspace</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-266.html">\medskip</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-306.html">\rule</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-318.html">\smallskip</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-345.html">\vfill</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-347.html">\vspace</A>
-</ul>
-See also
-<ul>
-<li><a href="ltx-118.html">spacing in math mode</a>
-</ul>
-
-<h2>Boxes</h2>
-A box is an object which TeX treats as a single character; it is therefore
-not broken across lines or pages.
-<p>
-The following commands create or manipulate boxes
-<ul>
-<li><A href="ltx-226.html">\fbox</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-237.html">\framebox</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-262.html">\makebox</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-265.html">\mbox</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-277.html">\newsavebox</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-294.html">\parbox</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-302.html">\raisebox</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-307.html">\savebox</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-307.html">\sbox</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-337.html">\usebox</A>
-</ul>
-
-<hr>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Sep 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-164.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-164.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 342a3e4219d..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-164.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,68 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX Special Characters</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Special Characters</font></h1>
-<p>
- The following characters play a special role in LaTeX and are called
- special printing characters, or simply special characters.
-<pre>
- # $ % & ~ _ ^ <tt>\</tt> { }
-</pre>
- Whenever you put one of these special characters into your file, you
- are doing something special, as described below.
-<p>
- If you simply want the character to be
- printed just as any other letter, include a <tt>\</tt> in front of the
- character. For example, <tt>\$</tt> will produce $ in your output.
-<br>
- Exceptions to this rule:
-<ul>
-<li><tt>\</tt> itself because
- <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a> has its own
- special meaning. Use <tt>$\backslash$</tt>.
-<li><tt>~</tt> and <tt>^</tt> because <tt>\~</tt> and <tt>\^</tt> produce
- <a href="ltx-401.html">accents</a>. Use
- <a href="ltx-342.html"><tt>\verb</tt></a> or the
- <a href="ltx-79.html">verbatim environment</a>.
-
-</ul>
-<h2>#</h2>
-The number (pound) sign is used to define use of arguments, for example,
-in the <a href="ltx-18.html"><tt>\newcommand</tt></a> command.
-<h2>$</h2>
-The dollar sign is used to delineate <a href="ltx-115.html#math">math</a> and
-<a href="ltx-421.html">displaymath</a> Enviroments.
-<h2>%</h2>
-The percent sign is used to insert <a href="ltx-434.html">Comments</a> in the
-input file, and to allow line breaks without generating a space.
-<h2>&amp;</h2>
-The ampersand is used to separate items in the <a href="ltx-202.html">array</a>
-and <a href="ltx-68.html">tabular</a> Enviroments.
-<h2>~</h2>
-The tilde generates a <a href="ltx-143.html">nonbreaking space</a>
-To create a tilde in the output, use
- <a href="ltx-342.html"><tt>\verb</tt></a> or the
- <a href="ltx-79.html">verbatim environment</a> (or cheat by using
- <tt>\~{}</tt>, i.e., placing a
- <a href="ltx-401.html">tilde accent</a> over a "blank" letter).
-<h2>_</h2>
-The underscore is used to create <a href="ltx-179.html">subscripts</a>
-<h2>^</h2>The carat (circumflex) symbol generates
-<a href="ltx-180.html">superscripts</a>.
- To create a carat in the output
- use <a href="ltx-342.html"><tt>\verb</tt></a> or the
- <a href="ltx-79.html">verbatim environment</a>.
-<h2>\ , { , and }</h2>
-The backslash and braces are used in
-<a href="ltx-17.html">command</a> definitions, for enclosing
-command arguments, and for delimiting scopes of
-<a href="declarations.html">declarations</a>.
-<hr>
-See also <a href="input.html">Input to LaTeX</a><br>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 15 Jul 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-165.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-165.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 0acce481a0d..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-165.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,24 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX Splitting the Input</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Splitting the Input</font></h1>
- A large document requires a lot of input. Rather than putting the
- whole input in a single large file, it's more efficient to split it
- into several smaller ones. Regardless of how many separate files you
- use, there is one that is the root file; it is the one whose name you
- type when you run LaTeX.
-
-<H2>Subtopics</H2>
-<ul>
-<li><A href="ltx-245.html">\include</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-246.html">\includeonly</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-248.html">\input</A>
-</ul>
-<hr>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Sep 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-169.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-169.html
deleted file mode 100644
index bfcf7224ec0..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-169.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,26 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX Starting and Ending</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Starting and Ending</font></h1>
-<p>
- Your input file must contain the following commands as a minimum.
-<pre><tt>
- <a href="ltx-22.html">\documentstyle{style}</a>
- \begin{document}
- ... your text goes here ...
- \end{document}
-</tt></pre>
- where the <tt>style</tt> selected is one the valid styles for LaTeX; see
- <a href="ltx-22.html">Document Styles</a>.
-<p>
- You may include other LaTeX commands between the <tt>\documentstyle</tt> and
- the <tt>\begin{document}</tt> commands.
-<hr>
-See also <a href="input.html">Input to LaTeX</a><br>
-Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 23 Jun 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-17.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-17.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 54755ef470a..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-17.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,51 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX Commands</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">LaTex Commands</font></h1>
-
-<p>Commands take one of two forms:</p>
-
-<ul>
- <li>a backslash (<tt>\</tt>) followed by a single special character
- <li>a backslash (<tt>\</tt>) followed by a string of letters
-</ul>
-
-<p>The second case is case-sensitive;
-<a href="ltx-405.html"><tt>\Gamma</tt></a> is different from
-<a href="ltx-405.html"><tt>\gamma</tt></a>.
-These commands are terminated by a nonletter, i.e., a blank, a number,
-a punctuation mark or special character. </p>
-
-<p>For commands which produce text a trailing blank is interpreted as the
-end of the command, which does not automatically create a space, so
-you may have to do something to create an
-<a href="ltx-431.html">interword space</a> after this text.</p>
-
-<p>Commands may have mandatory arguments, which are input in braces
-(<tt>{}</tt>).
-They may also have optional arguments, which are input in square brackets
-(<tt>[]</tt>).</p>
-
-<H2>Defining new commands, etc.</H2>
-
-<p>See: </p>
-
-<ul>
-<li><A href="ltx-18.html"><tt>\newcommand</tt></A>
-<li><A href="ltx-19.html"><tt>\newenvironment</tt></A>
-<li><A href="ltx-20.html"><tt>\newtheorem</tt></A>
-<li><A href="ltx-21.html"><tt>\newfont</tt></A>
-</ul>
-These must be used for entities which are not already defined. To
-redefine something use, for example,
-<A href="ltx-18.html"><tt>\renewcommand</tt></A>.
-<hr>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 03 Nov 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-170.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-170.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 4246f9dee24..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-170.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,41 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX Table of Contents</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Table of Contents</font></h1>
-<p>
- A table of contents is produced with the
- <a href="toc.html"><tt>\tableofcontents</tt></a> command. You
- put the command right where you want the table of contents to go;
- LaTeX does the rest for you.
- Entries are taken from the <a href="ltx-141.html">Sectioning</a> commands.
-<p>
- <tt>\tableofcontents</tt> produces a heading, but it does not
- automatically start a new page. If you want a new page after the
- table of contents, include a
- <a href="ltx-276.html"><tt>\newpage</tt></a> command after the
- <tt>\tableofcontents</tt> command.
-<p>
- There are similar commands <tt>\listoffigures</tt> and
- <tt>\listoftables</tt> for
- producing a list of figures and a list of tables, respectively.
- Everything works exactly the same as for the table of contents.
-<p>
- NOTE: Information for these tables and lists are placed in an auxiliary file
- and you may have to run latex twice to get it to come out correctly.
- If you want any of these items to be generated, you can not
- have the <tt>\nofiles</tt> command in your document as that would suppress
- writing of the auxiliary files.
-See also
-<ul>
-<li><a href="toc.html"><tt>\tableofcontents</tt></a>
-<li><A href="ltx-171.html"><tt>\addcontentsline</tt></A>
-<li><A href="ltx-172.html"><tt>\addtocontents</tt></A>
-</ul>
-<hr>
-Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 27 Sep 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-171.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-171.html
deleted file mode 100644
index a6cfc68d9f4..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-171.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,32 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \addcontentsline</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\addcontentsline</font></h1>
- <tt>\addcontentsline{file}{sec_unit}{entry}</tt>
-<p>
- The <tt>\addcontentsline</tt> command adds an entry to the specified list or
- table where
-<ul>
-<li><tt>file</tt> is the extension of the file on which information is to be
- written: toc (table of contents), lof (list of figures), or lot
- (list of tables).
-<li><tt>sec_unit</tt> controls the formatting of the entry. It should be one
- of the following, depending upon the value of the file argument:
- <ul>
- <li><TT>toc</TT> the name of the sectional unit, such as part or
- subsection.
- <li><TT>lof</TT> figure
- <li><TT>lot</TT> table
- </ul>
-<li><tt>entry</tt> is the text of the entry.
-</ul>
-<p>
-<hr>
-See also <a href="ltx-170.html">Table of Contents</a><br>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 28 Jun 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-172.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-172.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 32423986d3d..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-172.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,24 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \addtocontents</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\addtocontents</font></h1>
- <tt>\addtocontents{file}{text}</tt>
-<p>
- The <tt>\addtocontents</tt> command adds text (or formatting commands) directly
- to the file that generates the table of contents or list of figures or
- tables.
-<ul>
-<li><tt>file</tt> is the extension of the file on which information is to be
- written: toc (table of contents), lof (list of figures), or lot
- (list of tables).
-<li><tt>text</tt> is the information to be written.
-</ul>
-<hr>
-See also <a href="ltx-170.html">Table of Contents</a><br>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 28 Jun 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-173.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-173.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 5e94279d73a..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-173.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX Terminal Input and Output</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Terminal Input and Output</font></h1>
-Input from or output to the terminal is controlled by
-<ul>
-<li><A href="ltx-174.html">\typeout</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-175.html">\typein</A>
-</ul>
-<hr>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Sep 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-174.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-174.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 6cf8f287e3c..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-174.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,25 +0,0 @@
-<html><head><title>Help On LaTeX \typeout</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\typeout</font></h1>
-<p>
- <tt>\typeout{msg}</tt>
-<p>
- Prints <tt>msg</tt> on the terminal and in the log file. Commands in
- <tt>msg</tt> that are defined with <a href="ltx-18.html"><tt>\newcommand</tt>
- or <tt>\renewcommand</tt></a> are replaced by their
- definitions before being printed.
-<p>
- LaTeX's usual rules for treating multiple spaces as a single space and
- ignoring spaces after a command name apply to <tt>msg</tt>.
- A <a href="ltx-431.html"<tt>\&lt;space&gt;</tt></a> command
- in <tt>msg</tt> causes a single space to be printed.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-173.html">Terminal Input and Output</A><br>
-Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Sep 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-175.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-175.html
deleted file mode 100644
index b466a07ef25..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-175.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,22 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \typein</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\typein</font></h1>
- <tt>\typein[cmd]{msg}</tt>
-<p>
- Prints <tt>msg</tt> on the terminal and causes LaTeX to stop and wait for you
- to type a line of input, ending with return. If the <tt>cmd</tt> argument is
- missing, the typed input is processed as if it had been included in
- the input file in place of the <tt>\typein</tt> command. If the <tt>cmd</tt>
- argument is present, it must be a command name. This command name is then
- defined or redefined to be the typed input.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-173.html">Terminal Input and Output</A><br>
-Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Sep 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-176.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-176.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 9606ffcc49f..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-176.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,26 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX Typefaces</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Typefaces</font></h1>
-<p>
- The typeface is specified by giving the size and style. A typeface is
- also called a font.
-<p>
- In <a href="versions.html">LaTeX2e</a> the "styles" are replaced by a
- <a href="fonts2e.html">Font Selection</a> scheme.
-
-<H2>Subtopics</H2>
-<ul>
-<li><A href="ltx-177.html">Styles</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</A>
-<li><a href="mathfonts.html">Math fonts and styles</a>
-<li><a href="fonts2e.html">LaTeX2e Font Selection</a>
-</ul>
-<hr>
-Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 19 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-177.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-177.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 36d68f86c0b..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-177.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,55 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX Styles</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Styles</font></h1>
- The following type style commands are supported by LaTeX. Note
- that <a href="versions.html">LaTeX2e</a> differs on this point,
- having instead a <a href="fonts2e.html">Font Selection</a> scheme,
- but the following should still work (certainly in 2.09 mode).
- <ul>
- <li><a href="ltx-304.html"><tt>\rm</tt></a> Roman.
- <li><a href="ltx-249.html"><tt>\it</tt></a> Italics.
- <li><a href="ltx-221.html"><tt>\em</tt></a> Emphasis
- (toggles between <tt>\it</tt> and <tt>\rm</tt>).
- <li><a href="emph.html"><tt>\emph</tt></a> (LaTeX2e emphasis command)
- <li><a href="ltx-204.html"><tt>\bf</tt></a> Boldface.
- <li><a href="ltx-316.html"><tt>\sl</tt></a> Slanted.
- <li><a href="ltx-313.html"><tt>\sf</tt></a> Sans serif.
- <li><a href="ltx-308.html"><tt>\sc</tt></a> Small caps.
- <li><a href="ltx-331.html"><tt>\tt</tt></a> Typewriter.
-<p>
- <li><a href="boldmath.html"><tt>\boldmath</tt> and <tt>\unboldmath</tt></a>
- (affects math mode fonts only)
- </ul>
-These are LaTeX
-<a href="declarations.html"><em>delcarations</em></a> (with the exception of
-<a href="emph.html"><tt>\emph</tt></a>),
-i.e., they do not act on an argument, but change the way LaTeX prints the
-following text. The <em>scope</em> of a declaration is ended by a right
-brace (<tt>}</tt>) or an <tt>\end{}</tt> command whose matching
-left brace (<tt>{</tt>) or <tt>\begin{}</tt> precedes the declaration.
-<p>
-Thus, for a short piece of italics or bold-face text one would use
-<pre>
- This is {\it italics} and this is {\bf in boldface}.
-</pre>
-which would be set as "This is <em>italics</em> and this is
-<strong>in boldface</strong>.
-<p>
-In LaTeX2e the
-<a href="emph.html"><tt>\emph</tt></a> command is considered more
-suitable for short stretches of emphasized text. A typical use would be
-<pre>
- <tt>This is \emph{emphasized text}.</tt>
-</pre>
-<hr>
-See also Typeface <a href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</a><br>
-LaTeX2e <a href="fonts2e.html">Font Selection</a><br>
-See also <a href="mathfonts.html">Math fonts and styles</a><br>
-Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 19 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-178.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-178.html
deleted file mode 100644
index e29edcf5d4a..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-178.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,44 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX Sizes</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Sizes</font></h1>
- The following type size commands, in order of increasing font size,
- are supported by LaTeX.
-<ul>
- <li><a href="ltx-328.html"><tt>\tiny</tt></a>
- <li><a href="ltx-309.html"><tt>\scriptsize</tt></a>
- <li><a href="ltx-233.html"><tt>\footnotesize</tt></a>
- <li><a href="ltx-317.html"><tt>\small</tt></a>
- <li><a href="ltx-282.html"><tt>\normalsize</tt></a> (default)
- <li><a href="ltx-253.html"><tt>\large</tt></a>
- <li><a href="ltx-254.html"><tt>\Large</tt></a> (capital "l")
- <li><a href="ltx-255.html"><tt>\LARGE</tt></a> (all caps)
- <li><a href="ltx-242.html"><tt>\huge</tt></a>
- <li><a href="ltx-243.html"><tt>\Huge</tt></a> (capital "h")
-</ul>
-The default for <tt>\normalsize</tt> is 10-point, but it may differ
-for some <a href="ltx-22.html">Document Styles</a> or their options.
-The actual size produced by these commands also depends on the Document
-Style and, in some styles, more than one of these size commands may produce
-the same actual size.
-<p>
-The new size takes effect immediately after the size command;
-if an entire paragraph or unit is set in a certain size, the size command
-should include the blank line or the <tt>\end{}</tt> which delimites
-the unit. (See <a href="declarations.html">Declarations</a>.)
-<p>
-These commands cannot be used in <a href="ltx-130.html">math mode</a>.
-However, part of a formula may be set in a different size by using
-an <a href="ltx-265.html"><tt>\mbox</tt></a> command containing the
-size command.
-<hr>
-See also Typeface <a href="ltx-177.html">Styles</a>,
- <a href="fonts2e.html">LaTeX2e Font Selection</a><br>
-See also <a href="mathfonts.html">Math fonts and styles</a><br>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 14 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-179.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-179.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 8635de367ef..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-179.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,35 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX subscripts</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Subscripts</font></h1>
-<p>
- To get an expression, <tt>exp</tt>, to appear as a subscript, you just type
- <tt>_{exp}</tt>.<p>
- Can be used only in <a href="ltx-115.html#math">math</a> mode.
- Thus, for a simple expression that is part of the running text:
-<pre>
- <tt>H$_2$O is the formula for water</tt>
-</pre>
-should display as "H<sub>2</sub>O is the formula for water".
-Note that the braces around the argument may be omitted if the
-subscript is a single character.
-<p>
-If a symbol has both subscripts and superscripts, the order doesn't matter.
-The following are equivalent:<br>
-<pre> <tt>a_n^2</tt> and <tt>a^2_n</tt></pre>
-<p>
-Subscripts are normally displayed in a smaller font; to prevent this and,
-for example, use a standard Roman font, one would use;
-<pre>
- <tt>$J_{<a href="ltx-304.html">\rm</a> Roman}$</tt>
-</pre>
-<hr>
- See also: <A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>,
- <A href="ltx-180.html">Superscripts</A><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 31 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-18.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-18.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 715be743f32..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-18.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,88 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \newcommand and \renewcommand</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\newcommand \renewcommand</font></h1>
-<p>
- <tt>\newcommand{cmd}[args][opt]{def}</tt>
-<br>
- <tt>\renewcommand{cmd}[args][opt]{def}</tt>
-<br>
- <tt>\providecommand{cmd}[args][opt]{def}</tt> --
- <a href="versions.html">LaTeX2e</a>
-<p>
- These commands define (or redefine) a command.
-<ul>
-<li><TT>cmd</TT> The name of the new or redefined command.
- A <tt>\</tt> followed by a string of lower and/or uppercase
- letters or a <tt>\</tt> followed by a single nonletter.
- For <tt>\newcommand</tt> the name must
- not be already defined and must not begin with <tt>\end</tt>; for
- <tt>\renewcommand</tt> it must already be defined. The
- <tt>\providecommand</tt> command is identical to the <tt>\newcommand</tt>
- command if a command with this name does not exist; if it does
- already exist, the <tt>\providecommand</tt> does nothing and the
- old definition remains in effect.
-<p>
-<li><TT>args</TT> An integer from 1 to 9 denoting the number of arguments of
- the command being defined. The default is for the command to
- have no arguments.
-<p>
-<li><tt>opt</tt> (<strong><a href="versions.html">LaTeX2e only</a></strong>)
- If present, then the first of the number of arguments specified by
- <tt>args</tt> is optional with a default value of <tt>opt</tt>;
- if absent, then all of the arguments are required.
-<p>
-<li><TT>def</TT> The text to be substituted for every occurrence of cmd; a
- parameter of the form #n in cmd is replaced by the text of the
- nth argument when this substitution takes place.
-</ul>
-<h2>Examples</h2>
-<tt>\newcommand{\water}{H$_2$O}</tt>
-<p>
-This would allow one to write, e.g.,
-<pre>
- The formula for water is \water.
-</pre>
-or
-<pre>
- \water\ is the formula for water.
-</pre>
-Note, in the second case, the trailing <tt>\</tt> followed by a blank
-is required to ensure a blank space after the H<sub>2</sub>O;
-LaTeX ignores the blank following a command, so the space has
-to be specifically inserted with the
-<a href="ltx-431.html"><tt>\&lt;space&gt;</tt></a>.
-<p>
-As a second example consider
-<p>
-<tt>\newcommand{\hypotenuse}{$a^{2}+b^{2}$}</tt>
-<p>
-Note that this will produce the desired formula
-in text (paragraph) mode because of the <tt>$...$</tt> in the definition.
-In math mode, however, the first <tt>$</tt>
-in the definition will cause LaTeX to leave math mode, causing problems.
-<p>
-In <strong>LaTeX 2.09</strong> a standard trick for getting around this is
-to put the math-mode expression in an
-<a href="ltx-265.html"><tt>\mbox</tt></a>, viz.,
-<pre>
- <tt>\newcommand{\hypotenuse}{\mbox{$a^{2}+b^{2}$}}</tt>
-</pre>
-<p>
-In <strong>LaTeX2e</strong> the
-<a href="ensuremath.html"><tt>\ensuremath</tt></a> command has been
-provided to alleviate this problem. The argument of the <tt>\ensuremath</tt>
-command is always processed in math mode, regardless of the current mode.
-Using this mechanism the above could be written as
-<pre>
- <tt>\newcommand{\hypotenuse}{\ensuremath{a^{2}+y^{2}}}</tt>
-</pre>
-<hr>
-See also <a href="ltx-17.html">Commands</a><br>
-Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a><br>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 23 Jun 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-180.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-180.html
deleted file mode 100644
index f1dc0b481e7..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-180.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,40 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX Superscripts</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Superscripts</font></h1>
-<p>
- To get an expression, exp, to appear as a superscript, you just type
- <tt>^{exp}</tt>.<p>
- Can be used only in <a href="ltx-115.html#math">math</a> mode.
-Thus, for a simple expression that is part of the running text:
-<pre>
- <tt>x$^3$ is the third power of x</tt>
-</pre>
-should display as "x<sup>3</sup> is the third power of x". Note that
-the braces around the argument may be omitted if the superscript is
-a single character.
-<p>
-If a symbol has both subscripts and superscripts, the order doesn't matter.
-The following are equivalent:<br>
-<pre> <tt>a_n^2</tt> and <tt>a^2_n</tt></pre>
-<p>
-Superscripts may have their own superscripts:
-<pre>
- <tt>$x^{y^{z}}$</tt>
-</pre>
-should display something like
-<pre>
- z
- y
- x
-</pre>
-<hr>
- See also: <A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>,
- <A href="ltx-179.html">Subscripts</A><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 31 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-181.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-181.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 4c58f7aba77..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-181.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \\</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\\</font></h1>
-<p>
- <tt>\\[*][extra-space]</tt>
-<p>
- The <tt>\\</tt> command tells LaTeX to start a new line. It has an optional
- argument, extra-space, that specifies how much extra vertical space is
- to be inserted before the next line. This can be a negative amount.
-<p>
- The <tt>\\*</tt> command is the same as the ordinary <tt>\\</tt> command except that it
- tells LaTeX not to start a new page after the line.
-<p>
- These commands are <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</A><br>
-See also <a href="ltx-202.html">Array</a>,
- <a href="ltx-58.html">Tabbing</a>, and
- <a href="ltx-68.html">Tabular</a> Environments<br>
-Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Sep 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-182.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-182.html
deleted file mode 100644
index e2f0ee12b6b..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-182.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,26 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \-</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\-</font></h1>
-<p>
-<h2>In normal text</h2>
- the <tt>\-</tt> command tells LaTeX that it may hyphenate the word at that
- point. LaTeX is very good at hyphenating, and it will usually find
- all correct hyphenation points. The <tt>\-</tt> command is used for the
- exceptional cases.
-<p>
-<h2>In the <a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</a> environment</h2>
- the <tt>\-</tt> command moves the left margin of the next and all the following
- commands one tab stop to the left.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>,
- <A href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</A>,
- <A href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</A><br>
-See also <a href="ltx-244.html"><tt>\hyphenation</tt></a><br>
-Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 15 Jun 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-183.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-183.html
deleted file mode 100644
index daf7a958ded..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-183.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \;</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\;</font></h1>
- Include a thick space in <a href="ltx-115.html">math mode</a>.
-
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>,
- <A href="ltx-118.html">Spacing in Math Mode</A><br>
-Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Sep 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-184.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-184.html
deleted file mode 100644
index f363524f581..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-184.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \:</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\:</font></h1>
- Include a medium space in <a href="ltx-115.html">math mode</a>.
-
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>,
- <A href="ltx-118.html">Spacing in Math Mode</A><br>
-Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Sep 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-185.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-185.html
deleted file mode 100644
index fda562d9408..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-185.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \,</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\,</font></h1>
-<p>
- Include a thin space; can be used in all <a href="ltx-130.html">modes</a>,
- not just math.
-<hr>
-See also: <A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>,
- <A href="ltx-118.html">Spacing in Math Mode</A><br>
-Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 10 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body></html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-186.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-186.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 8046229a6f1..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-186.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \!</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\!</font></h1>
- Include a negative thin space in <a href="ltx-115.html">math mode</a>.
-
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>,
- <A href="ltx-118.html">Spacing in Math Mode</A><br>
-Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Sep 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-187.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-187.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 0a7ae1218df..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-187.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,20 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \=</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\=</font></h1>
-<h2>In normal text</h2>
-Produces a macron <a href="ltx-401.html">accent</a> (an over bar)
-on the following character.
-
-<h2>In the <a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</a> environment</h2>
- The <tt>\=</tt> command sets the tab stops.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>,
- <A href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</A><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 8 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-188.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-188.html
deleted file mode 100644
index a022349e222..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-188.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,16 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \&gt;</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\&gt;</font></h1>
- The <tt>\&gt;</tt> command causes LaTeX to advance to the next tab stop.
-
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</A><br>
-Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Sep 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-189.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-189.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 9150944470a..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-189.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \&lt;</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\&lt;</font></h1>
- The <tt>\&lt;</tt> command allows you to put something to the left of the local
- margin without changing the margin.
-
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</A><br>
-Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Sep 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-19.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-19.html
deleted file mode 100644
index a0474f32e71..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-19.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,50 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \newenvironment</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\newenvironment</font></h1>
-
- <tt>\newenvironment{nam}[args]{begdef}{enddef}</tt>
- <tt>\renewenvironment{nam}[args]{begdef}{enddef}</tt>
-<p>
- These commands define or redefine an environment.
-<p>
-<ul>
-<li><TT>nam</TT> The name of the environment.
- For <tt>\newenvironment</tt> there
- must be no currently defined environment by that name, nor may the
- command <tt>\nam</tt> be currently defined. For
- <tt>\renewenvironment</tt> the
- environment "<tt>nam</tt>" must already be defined. <tt>nam</tt>
- may contain letters, numbers, and asterisks; it may <strong>not</strong>
- begin with "end...".
-<p>
-<li><TT>args</TT> An integer from 1 to 9 denoting the number of arguments of
- the newly-defined environment. The default is no arguments.
-<p>
-<li><TT>begdef</TT> The text substituted for every occurrence of
- <tt>\begin{nam}</tt>; a parameter of the form <tt>#n</tt> in
- <tt>begdef</tt> is replaced by
- the text of the nth argument when this substitution takes place.
-<p>
-<li><TT>enddef</TT> The text substituted for every occurrence of
- <tt>\end{nam}</tt>. It may not contain any argument parameters.
-</ul>
-<h2>Changes in <a href="versions.html">LaTeX2e</a></h2>
-It is possible to have an optional argument, the form of the command being
-<pre>
- <tt>\newenvironment{nam}[args][opt]{begdef}{enddef}
- \renewenvironment{nam}[args][opt]{begdef}{enddef}</tt>
-</pre>
-If <tt>opt</tt> is present, the first of the <tt>args</tt> arguments
-is optional with default value <tt>opt</tt>. If it is absent all
-arguments are mandatory.
-<hr>
-See also <a href="ltx-17.html">Defining commands</a>,
-<a href="ltx-27.html">Environments</a><br>
-Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 Nov 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-190.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-190.html
deleted file mode 100644
index edd61c28adf..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-190.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \+</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\+</font></h1>
- The <tt>\+</tt> command moves the left margin of the next and all the following
- commands one tab stop to the right.
-
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</A><br>
-Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Sep 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-191.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-191.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 05f53f0e3d5..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-191.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,28 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \'</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\'</font></h1>
-<h2>In normal text</h2>
-Produces an acute <a href="ltx-401.html">accent</a> on the following character.
-
-<h2>In the <a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</a> environment</h2>
- The <tt>\'</tt> command moves everything that you have typed so far in the
- current column , everything starting from the most recent
- <a href="ltx-188.html"><tt>\&gt;</tt></a>,
- <a href="ltx-189.html"><tt>\&lt;</tt></a>,
- <a href="ltx-192.html"><tt> \'</tt></a>,
- <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a>,
- or
- <a href="ltx-251.html"><tt>\kill</tt></a>
- command, to the right of the previous column, flush
- against the current column's tab stop.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>,
-<A href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</A><br>
- Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 1 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-192.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-192.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 9ae2a1b7189..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-192.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,30 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \`</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\`</font></h1>
-<p>
-<h2>In normal text</h2>
-Produces a grave <a href="ltx-401.html">accent</a> on the following character.
-
-<h2>In the <a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</a> environment</h2>
- The <tt>\`</tt> command allows you to put text flushed right against any tab
- stop, including tab stop 0. However, it can't move text to the right
- of the last column because there's no tab stop there. The <tt>\`</tt> command
- moves all the text that follows it, up to the
- <a href="ltx-181.html"> <tt>\\</tt></a> or
- <tt>\end{tabbing}</tt>
- command that ends the line, to the right margin of the tabbing
- environment. There must be no
- <a href="ltx-188.html"><tt>\&gt;</tt></a> or
- <a href="ltx-191.html"><tt>\'</tt></a> command between the <tt>\`</tt> and the
- command that ends the line.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>,
- <A href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</A><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 8 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-195.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-195.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 64f5fabb3c8..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-195.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,20 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \addtocounter</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\addtocounter</font></h1>
-<p>
- <tt>\addtocounter{counter}{value}</tt>
-<p>
- The <tt>\addtocounter</tt> command increments the <tt>counter</tt>
- by the amount
- specified by the <tt>value</tt> argument,
- which can be negative.
-<hr>
-See also: <A href="ltx-3.html">Counters</A><br>
-Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 2 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-198.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-198.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 3b91b06f440..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-198.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,23 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \addvspace</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\addvspace</font></h1>
-<p>
- <tt>\addvspace{length}</tt>
-<p>
-
- The <tt>\addvspace</tt> command normally adds a vertical space of height
- <tt>length</tt>.
- However, if vertical space has already been added to the same
- point in the output by a previous <tt>\addvspace</tt> command, then this
- command will not add more space than needed to make the natural length
- of the total vertical space equal to length.
-<hr>
-See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 10 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-199.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-199.html
deleted file mode 100644
index cee315a9884..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-199.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,22 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \alph</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\alph</font></h1>
-
- <tt>\alph{counter}</tt>
-<p>
- This command causes the current value of <tt>counter</tt> to be printed in
- alphabetic characters. The <tt>\alph</tt> command causes lower case alphabetic
- characters, i.e., a, b, c..., while the <tt>\Alph</tt> command causes upper
- case alphabetic characters, i.e., A, B, C...
-<p>
- The value of the counter must be less than 27.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-3.html">Counters</A><br>
-Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 18 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-2.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-2.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 9537a1851fa..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-2.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,328 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX Commands</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-
-<h2><font color="#cc0000">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font></h2>
-
-<hr width="10%" align=left>
-
-<h1><font color="#cc0000">Help by <a href="#subj">Subject</a>,
-<a href="#cmd">Command</a>, or <a href="#env">Environment</a></font></h1>
-
-
-<h2><a name="subj">Subjects</a></h2>
-
-<ul>
- <li><a href="ltx-401.html">Accenting characters</a> (umlauts, graves, etc.)
- <li><a href="ltx-202.html">Arrays</a> (math mode)
- <li><a href="ltx-17.html">Commands</a>, defining and redefining
- <li><a href="ltx-434.html">Comments in input file</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-13.html">Cross References</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-430.html">Dashes</a>
- <li><a href="declarations.html">Declarations</a> (changing how things look)
- <li><a href="ltx-17.html">Defining New Commands</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-22.html">Document Styles</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-27.html">Environments</a>
- (or see <a href="#env">list below</a>)
- <li><a href="ltx-82.html">Footnotes</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-176.html">Fonts</a>
- <li><a href="fragile.html">Fragile commands</a> (and how to protect them)
- <li><a href="input.html">Input to LaTeX</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-402.html">International characters and punctuation</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</a> and how to change them
- <li><a href="ltx-91.html">Letters</a> (as in "Dear John")
- <li><a href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</a>
- <li><a href="lists.html">Lists</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-111.html">Making Paragraphs</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a> and
- <a href="ltx-117.html">Math Symbols</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-130.html">Modes</a> (paragraph, left-right, math)
- <li><a href="ltx-402.html">Non-English characters and punctuation</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-131.html">Page Styles</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-43.html">Picture environment</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-433.html">Quotation Marks</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-141.html">Sectioning</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-164.html">Special Characters</a>: # $ % &amp; ~ _ ^ \ { }
- <li>Special Symbols
- <ul>
- <li><a href="ltx-401.html">Accents on characters</a>
- (umlauts, graves, etc.)
- <li><a href="ltx-406.html">Arrows</a> (math mode)
- <li><a href="ltx-404.html">Binary and relational operators</a> (math mode)
- <li><a href="ltx-403.html">Delimiters</a>
- (parenthesis-like objects; math mode)
- <li><a href="ellipses.html">Ellipses</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-405.html">Greek letters</a> (math mode)
- <li><a href="ltx-407.html">Miscellaneous symbols</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-409.html">Math functions</a>
- (sin, cos, log, ...; math mode)
- <li><a href="ltx-408.html">Variable size math symbols</a>
- (sums, integrals, ...; math mode)
- </ul>
- <li><a href="ltx-165.html">Splitting the Input</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-169.html">Starting and Ending</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-179.html">Subscripts</a> and
- <a href="ltx-180.html">Superscripts</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-67.html">Table</a>,
- <a href="ltx-68.html">Tabular</a> and
- <a href="ltx-58.html">Tabbing</a> Environments
- <li><a href="ltx-170.html">Table of Contents</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-173.html">Terminal Input and Output</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</a>
-</ul>
-
-<h2><a name="cmd">LaTeX Commands</a></h2>
-
-<p>A LaTeX command begins with the command name, which consists of a <tt>\</tt>
-followed by either (a) a string of letters or (b) a single non-letter.
-Arguments contained in square brackets [] are optional while arguments
-contained in braces {} are required.</p>
-
-<p>NOTE: LaTeX is case sensitive. Enter all commands in lower case
-unless explicitly directed to do otherwise.</p>
-
-<ul>
- <li><a href="ltx-431.html"><tt>\&lt;space&gt;</tt></a> (force ordinary space)
- <li><a href="ltx-432.html"><tt>\@</tt></a> (following period ends sentence)
- <li><a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a> (new line)
- <li><a href="ltx-185.html"><tt>\,</tt></a> (thin space)
- <li><a href="ltx-183.html"><tt>\;</tt></a> (thick space, math mode)
- <li><a href="ltx-184.html"><tt>\:</tt></a> (medium space, math mode)
- <li><a href="ltx-186.html"><tt>\!</tt></a> (negative thin space, math mode)
- <li><a href="ltx-182.html"><tt>\-</tt></a>
- (hyphenation; <a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</a>)
- <li><a href="ltx-187.html"><tt>\=</tt></a>
- (set tab, see <a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</a>)
- <li><a href="ltx-188.html"><tt>\&gt;</tt></a>
- (tab, see <a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</a>)
- <li><a href="ltx-189.html"><tt>\&lt;</tt></a>
- (back tab, see <a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</a>)
- <li><a href="ltx-190.html"><tt>\+</tt></a>
- (see <a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</a>)
- <li><a href="ltx-191.html"><tt>\'</tt></a>
- (<a href="ltx-401.html">accent</a> or <a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</a>)
- <li><a href="ltx-192.html"><tt>\`</tt></a>
- (<a href="ltx-401.html">accent</a> or <a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</a>)
- <li><a href="ltx-403.html"><tt>\|</tt></a> (double vertical lines, math mode)
- <li><tt>\(</tt> and <tt>\)</tt>
- (define <a href="ltx-115.html#math">math environment</a>)
- <li><tt>\[</tt> and <tt>\]</tt>
- (define <a href="ltx-421.html">displaymath environment</a>)
- <li><a href="ltx-171.html">\addcontentsline</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-172.html">\addtocontents</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-195.html">\addtocounter</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-93.html">\address</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-89.html">\addtolength</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-198.html">\addvspace</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-199.html">\alph</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-200.html">\appendix</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-201.html">\arabic</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-203.html">\author</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-164.html">\backslash</a>
- <li><a href="baselineskip.html">\baselineskip</a>
- <li><a href="baselineskip.html">\baselinestretch</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-204.html">\bf</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-205.html">\bibitem</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-206.html">\bigskip</a>
- <li><a href="boldmath.html">\boldmath</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-407.html">\cal</a>
- <li><a href="caption.html">\caption</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-207.html">\cdots</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-30.html">\centering</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-210.html">\circle</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-211.html">\cite</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-212.html">\cleardoublepage</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-213.html">\clearpage</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-214.html">\cline</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-98.html">\closing</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-216.html">\dashbox</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-217.html">\date</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-218.html">\ddots</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-220.html">\dotfill</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-221.html">\em</a>
- <li><a href="ensuremath.html">\ensuremath</a> (LaTeX2e)
- <li><a href="ltx-226.html">\fbox</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-227.html">\flushbottom</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-230.html">\fnsymbol</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-231.html">\footnote</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-232.html">\footnotemark</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-233.html">\footnotesize</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-234.html">\footnotetext</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-235.html">\frac</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-236.html">\frame</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-237.html">\framebox</a>
- <li><a href="frenchsp.html">\frenchspacing</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-238.html">\hfill</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-239.html">\hline</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-240.html">\hrulefill</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-241.html">\hspace</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-242.html">\huge</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-243.html">\Huge (capital "h")</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-244.html">\hyphenation</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-245.html">\include</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-246.html">\includeonly</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-247.html">\indent</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-248.html">\input</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-249.html">\it</a>
- <li><a href="item.html">\item</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-251.html">\kill</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-252.html">\label</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-253.html">\large</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-254.html">\Large (capital "l")</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-255.html">\LARGE (all caps)</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-256.html">\ldots</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-403.html#big">\left</a>
- <li><a href="lefteqn.html">\lefteqn</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-257.html">\line</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-258.html">\linebreak</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-259.html">\linethickness</a>
- <li><a href="textwidth.html">\linewidth</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-261.html">\location</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-262.html">\makebox</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-263.html">\maketitle</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-264.html">\markboth \markright</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-407.html">\mathcal</a>
- <li><a href="stackrel.html#mathop">\mathop</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-265.html">\mbox</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-266.html">\medskip</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-268.html">\multicolumn</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-269.html">\multiput</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-18.html">\newcommand</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-271.html">\newcounter</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-19.html">\newenvironment</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-21.html">\newfont</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-87.html">\newlength</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-275.html">\newline</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-276.html">\newpage</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-277.html">\newsavebox</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-20.html">\newtheorem</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-279.html">\nocite</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-280.html">\noindent</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-281.html">\nolinebreak</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-282.html">\normalsize</a> (default)
- <li><a href="ltx-283.html">\nopagebreak</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-404.html#not">\not</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-284.html">\onecolumn</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-97.html">\opening</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-286.html">\oval</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-287.html">\overbrace</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-288.html">\overline</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-289.html">\pagebreak</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-137.html">\pagenumbering</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-291.html">\pageref</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-138.html">\pagestyle</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-293.html">\par</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-294.html">\parbox</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-86.html#lencmd">\parindent</a>
- <li><a href="parskip.html">\parskip</a>
- <li><a href="fragile.html">\protect</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-18.html">\providecommand</a> (LaTeX2e)
- <li><a href="ltx-296.html">\put</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-299.html">\raggedbottom</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-300.html">\raggedleft</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-301.html">\raggedright</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-302.html">\raisebox</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-303.html">\ref</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-18.html">\renewcommand</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-403.html#big">\right</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-304.html">\rm</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-305.html">\roman</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-306.html">\rule</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-307.html">\savebox</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-307.html">\sbox</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-308.html">\sc</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-309.html">\scriptsize</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-310.html">\setcounter</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-88.html">\setlength</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-90.html">\settowidth</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-313.html">\sf</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-314.html">\shortstack</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-315.html">\signature</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-316.html">\sl</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-317.html">\small</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-318.html">\smallskip</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-319.html">\sqrt</a>
- <li><a href="stackrel.html">\stackrel</a>
- <li><a href="toc.html">\tableofcontents</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-323.html">\telephone</a>
- <li><a href="textwidth.html">\textwidth</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-86.html#lencmd">\textheight</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-324.html">\thanks</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-140.html">\thispagestyle</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-328.html">\tiny</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-329.html">\title</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-330.html">\today</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-331.html">\tt</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-332.html">\twocolumn</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-174.html">\typeout</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-175.html">\typein</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-335.html">\underbrace</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-336.html">\underline</a>
- <li><a href="unitlength.html">\unitlength</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-337.html">\usebox</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-338.html">\usecounter</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-339.html">\value</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-340.html">\vdots</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-341.html">\vector</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-342.html">\verb</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-345.html">\vfill</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-346.html">\vline</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-403.html#big">\vphantom</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-347.html">\vspace</a>
-</ul>
-
-
-<h2><a name="env">LaTeX Environments</a></h2>
-
-<p>LaTeX <a href="ltx-27.html">environments</a> are created by</p>
-
-<pre> \begin{<b>environment</b>} ... \end{<b>environment</b>}</pre>
-
-<p><a href="declarations.html">Declarations</a> can be effected by an
-environment of the same name.</p>
-
-<ul>
- <li><a href="ltx-420.html">abstract</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-202.html">array</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-29.html">center</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-31.html">description</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-421.html">displaymath</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-222.html">enumerate</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-223.html">eqnarray</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-224.html">equation</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-225.html">figure</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-228.html">flushleft</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-229.html">flushright</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-250.html">itemize</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-260.html">list</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-115.html#math">math</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-267.html">minipage</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-43.html">picture</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-297.html">quotation</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-298.html">quote</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-67.html">table</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-68.html">tabular</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-73.html">thebibliography</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-77.html">theorem</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-78.html">titlepage</a>
- <li><a href="trivlist.html">trivlist</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-79.html">verbatim</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-81.html">verse</a>
-</ul>
-
-<hr>
-
-<p>Return to the <a href="index.html">Introduction</a></p>
-
-<hr>
-
-<address>
-Page revised: 1997:05:15, RBS
-</address>
-
-</body>
-</html>
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-20.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-20.html
deleted file mode 100644
index fcb6b6960d9..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-20.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,35 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \newtheorem</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\newtheorem</font></h1>
-<p>
- <tt>\newtheorem{env_name}{caption}[within]</tt>
- <tt>\newtheorem{env_name}[numbered_like]{caption}</tt>
-<p>
- This command defines a theorem-like environment.
-<ul>
-<li><TT>env_name</TT> The name of the environment -- a string of letters.
- Must not be the name of an existing environment or counter.
-<p>
-<li><TT>caption</TT> The text printed at the beginning of the environment,
- right before the number.
-<p>
-<li><TT>within</TT> The name of an already defined counter, usually of a
- sectional unit. Provides a means of resetting the new theorem
- counter within the sectional unit.
-<p>
-<li><TT>numbered_like</TT> The name of an already defined theorem-like
- environment.
-</ul>
-
- The <tt>\newtheorem</tt> command may have at most one optional argument.
-
-<hr>
-Go back to <a href="ltx-17.html">Definitions</a><br>
-Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 2 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-200.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-200.html
deleted file mode 100644
index d49f3203700..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-200.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,44 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \appendix</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\appendix</font></h1>
- <tt>\appendix</tt>
-<p>
- The <tt>\appendix</tt> command changes the way sectional units are numbered.
- The <tt>\appendix</tt> command generates no text and does not affect the
- numbering of parts.
-<p>Thus, if you want your appendix to be set off with a section-like
-label you need something like<pre>
- <tt>\begin{<a href="ltx-29.html">center</a>}
- {<a href="ltx-204.html">\bf</a> APPENDIX}
- \end{center}</tt>
-</pre>
-<hr>
-I have found the <tt>\appendix</tt> command to sometimes cause
-problems since <em>everything</em> which follows it is treated as part of
-the appendix, for example, a list of figures, which I generally
-want to place after an appendix is labeled "Appendix: List of Figures".
-<p>
-One can create a section labeled "APPENDIX" with distinctive numbering
-by using the <a href="ltx-141.html"><tt>\section</tt></a> command
-with suitably redefined commands for the <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a>.
-The following example generates a single "Appendix" with equations numbered
-A-1, A-2, ... <pre>
- <tt><a href="ltx-18.html">\renewcommand</a>{\theequation}{A-\arabic{equation}}
- % redefine the command that creates the equation no.
- <a href="ltx-310.html">\setcounter</a>{equation}{0} % reset counter
- <a href="ltx-141.html">\section*</a>{APPENDIX} % use *-form to suppress numbering</tt>
-</pre>
-If one had several appendices, appropriate numbering could be obtained by
-redefining the <tt>\thesection</tt> command and resetting the section
-counter in an analogous manner.
-<hr>
-See also: <A href="ltx-141.html">Sectioning</A>,
- <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a><br>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 14 Jul 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-201.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-201.html
deleted file mode 100644
index d64e76faf58..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-201.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \arabic</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\arabic</font></h1>
-
- <tt>\arabic{counter}</tt>
-<p>
- The <tt>\arabic</tt> command causes the current value of <tt>counter</tt>
- to be printed in arabic numbers, i.e., 3.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-3.html">Counters</A><br>
-Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 18 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-202.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-202.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 5727ba7bcfd..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-202.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,68 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX arrays</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Arrays</font></h1>
-<p>
-<p><pre>
- \begin{array}[pos]{vvvv}
- column 1 entry &amp: column 2 entry ... &amp; column n entry \\
- ...
- ...
- ...
- \end{array}
-</pre><p>
- The array environment, like the <a href="ltx-68.html">tabular</a>
- environment, produces a <a href="ltx-143.html">box</a>
- consisting of a sequence of rows of
- vertically aligned columns. It can be used only within the
- <a href="ltx-115.html">math environment</a>.
-<p>
- There is a single mandatory argument describing the number of columns and
- the alignment within each of them.
- Each of the <tt>v</tt>'s in the argument specifies a column and may be
- a <tt>l</tt>, <tt>c</tt>, or <tt>r</tt> indicating that the column should
- be flush left, centered, or flush right, respectively. For more
- complex options, see the <a href="ltx-68.html">tabular environment</a>
- which uses the same format.
-<p>
- The optional <tt>pos</tt> argument specifies the alignment of the array with
- its surrounding environment (recall that LaTeX treats boxes as one,
- albeit large letter). The options are
-<ul>
-<li><tt>t</tt> - align on top row
-<li><tt>b</tt> - align on bottom row
-</ul>
-The default is to align on the center of the array.
-<p>
- Column entries must be separated by an <tt>&amp;</tt>. Column entries
- may include other LaTeX commands, even other arrays.
- Each row of the array must be terminated with
- the string <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a>.
- Note that there is no <tt>&amp;</tt> after the last
- item in a row and no <tt>\\</tt> after the last row. (An exception is if
- an <tt><a href="ltx-239.html">\hline</a></tt> is used to place a line
- at the bottom; it follows a <tt>\\</tt>.)
-<p>
-Each item in the array is treated as if it were surrounded by braces. Thus,
-a <a href="declarations.html">declaration</a> within an array item is
-local to that item, i.e., it is ended by an <tt>&amp;</tt> or <tt>\\</tt>.
-<p>
-Horizontal and vertical lines in the array are produced with
-<ul>
-<li><a href="ltx-214.html"><tt>\cline</tt></a>
-<li><a href="ltx-239.html"><tt>\hline</tt></a>
-<li><a href="ltx-346.html"><tt>\vline</tt></a>
-</ul>
-<hr>
-See also
-<ul>
- <li><a href="ltx-68.html">tabular environment</a><br>
- <li><a href="ltx-115.html">math environment</a>
-</ul>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 31 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-203.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-203.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 5c5e6604c0a..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-203.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,34 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \author</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\author</font></h1>
-<p>
- <tt>\author{names}</tt>
-<p>
- The <tt>\author</tt> command declares the author(s), where names is a list of
- authors separated by <tt>\and</tt> commands. Use
- <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a>
- to separate lines within a
- single author's entry -- for example, to give the author's institution
- or address.
-<p>
- NOTE: The milstd and book-form styles have re-defined the
- <A href="ltx-263.html"><tt>\maketitle</tt></a>
- command. The
- <a href="ltx-329.html"><tt>\title</tt></a>
- declaration is the only command that has any meaning.
-<p>
- A footnote for an author is produced with the
- <a href="ltx-324.html"><tt>\thanks</tt></a> command.
-
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-131.html">Page Styles</A><br>
-See also <A href="ltx-263.html"><tt>\maketitle</tt></A>,
- <a href="ltx-329.html"><tt>\title</tt></a><br>
-Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 Nov 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-204.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-204.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 44ed7387d11..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-204.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,20 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \bf</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\bf</font></h1>
-<p>
- Boldface typeface.
-<p>
-This is version 2.09; see also
- <a href="fonts2e.html">LaTeX2e font selection</a><br>
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>,
- <A href="ltx-177.html">Styles</A><br>
-See also <a href="boldmath.html"><tt>\boldmath</tt></a><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-205.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-205.html
deleted file mode 100644
index d290d2c7cb7..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-205.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,42 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \bibitem</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\bibitem</font></h1>
-<p>
- <tt>\bibitem[label]{cite_key}</tt>
-<p>
-
- The <tt>\bibitem</tt> command generates an entry labeled by <tt>label</tt>.
- If the <tt>label</tt>
- argument is missing, a number is generated as the label, using
- the <tt>enumiv</tt>
- <a href="ltx-3.html">counter</a>.
- The <tt>cite_key</tt> is a mnemonic consisting of any sequence of letters,
- numbers, and punctuation symbols not containing a comma.
-<p>
- <tt>\bibitem</tt> and <a href="ltx-211.html"><tt>\cite</tt></a> are used
- together much as <a href="ltx-252.html"><tt>\label</tt></a> and
- <a href="ltx-303.html"><tt>\ref</tt></a> to produce a correspondence
- between items in the Reference or Bibliography
- (<a href="ltx-73.html"><tt>thebibliography</tt></a> environment).
-<p>
- This command writes
- an entry on the aux file containing <tt>cite_key</tt> and the item's
- <tt>label</tt>.
- When this aux file is read by the
- <a href="ltx-169.html"><tt>\begin{document}</tt></a> command, the item's
- <tt>label</tt> is associated with <tt>cite_key</tt>,
- causing the reference to <tt>cite_key</tt> by a
- <a href="ltx-211.html"><tt>\cite</tt></a> command to produce the
- associated <tt>label</tt>.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A><br>
-See also <A href="ltx-73.html"><tt>thebibliography</tt></A>,
- <a href="ltx-211.html"><tt>\cite</tt></a><br>
-Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 17 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-206.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-206.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 6649b51b387..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-206.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \bigskip</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\bigskip</font></h1>
-<p>
- The <tt>\bigskip</tt> command is equivalent to
- <tt>\vspace{\bigskipamount}</tt> where
- <tt>\bigskipamount</tt> is determined by the document style.
-<hr>
-See also: <A href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</A><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 10 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-207.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-207.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 287ce7da3fc..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-207.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,26 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \cdots</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\cdots</font></h1>
-<p>
- The <tt>\cdots</tt> command produces a horizontal ellipsis where the dots are
- raised to the center of the line.<br>
- Can be used only in math mode.
-<p>
-See also:
-<ul>
-<li><A href="ltx-218.html">\ddots</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-256.html">\ldots</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-340.html">\vdots</A>
-<p>
-<li><A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>,
-<li><A href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</A>.
-</ul>
-<p>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 25 April 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-21.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-21.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 9bfe0b716d4..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-21.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,20 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \newfont</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\newfont</font></h1>
-<p>
- <tt>\newfont{cmd}{font_name}</tt>
-<p>
-
- Defines the command name <tt>cmd</tt>, which must not be currently defined, to
- be a declaration that selects the font named <tt>font_name</tt> to be the
- current font.
-<hr>
-Go back to <a href="ltx-17.html">Definitions</a><br>
-Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 2 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-210.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-210.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 554e7b8619d..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-210.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \circle</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\circle</font></h1>
- <tt>\circle[*]{diameter}</tt>
-<p>
- The <tt>\circle</tt> command produces a circle of the specified diameter. If
- the *-form of the command is used, LaTeX draws a solid circle.
-<hr>
-See also: <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>,
- <A href="ltx-43.html">picture</A><br>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 28 Jun 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-211.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-211.html
deleted file mode 100644
index a9fd440a2af..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-211.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,32 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \cite</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\cite</font></h1>
-<p>
- <tt>\cite[text]{key_list}</tt>
-<p>
-
- The <tt>key_list</tt> argument is a list of citation keys. This command
- generates an in-text citation to the references associated with the
- keys in <tt>key_list</tt> by entries on the aux file read by the
- <a href="ltx-169.html"><tt>\begin{document}</tt></a> command.
-<p>
- <a href="ltx-205.html"><tt>\bibitem</tt></a> and <tt>\cite</tt> are used
- together much as <a href="ltx-252.html"><tt>\label</tt></a> and
- <a href="ltx-303.html"><tt>\ref</tt></a> to produce a correspondence
- between items in the Reference or Bibliography
- (<a href="ltx-73.html"><tt>thebibliography</tt></a> environment).
-<p>
-The <tt>\cite</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>.
-<hr>
- See also <a href="ltx-27.html">Environments</a>,
- <A href="ltx-13.html">Cross References</A><br>
- See also <a href="ltx-73.html"><tt>thebibliography</tt></a>,
- <a href="ltx-205.html"><tt>\bibitem</tt></a><br>
- Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 4 Jul 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-212.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-212.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 8116dbf6023..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-212.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \cleardoublepage</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\cleardoublepage</font></h1>
-<p>
- The <tt>\cleardoublepage</tt> command ends the current page and causes all
- figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be
- printed. In a two-sided printing style, it also makes the next page a
- right-hand (odd-numbered) page, producing a blank page if necessary.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</A><br>
-Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-213.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-213.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 8cee5c21f9d..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-213.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,16 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \clearpage</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\clearpage</font></h1>
-<p>
- The <tt>\clearpage</tt> command ends the current page and causes all figures
- and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</A><br>
-Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-214.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-214.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 41932ca6a02..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-214.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,28 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \cline</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\cline</font></h1>
- <tt>\cline{i-j}</tt>
-<p>
- The <tt>\cline</tt> command draws horizontal lines across the columns
- specified, beginning in column i and ending in column j, which are
- identified in the mandatory argument.
-<p>
-It is used in the <A href="ltx-68.html">tabular</A> and
-<a href="ltx-202.html">array</a> environment.
-<p>
- Two (or more) successive <tt>\cline</tt> commands draw lines in the same
- vertical position. Typically, <tt>\cline</tt> commands are placed after a
- <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a> (line breadk) command so that
- they separate items on two lines; they do
- not, however, need a line break command afterwards.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-68.html">tabular</A> and
- <a href="ltx-202.html">array</a> environments<br>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 10 Oct 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-216.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-216.html
deleted file mode 100644
index d0b9abfc97b..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-216.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,22 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \dashbox</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\dashbox</font></h1>
- <tt>\dashbox{dash length}(width,height)[pos]{ ... }</tt>
-<p>
- Used only in the <a href="ltx-43.html">picture environement</a>,
- the <tt>\dashbox</tt> is like <a href="ltx-237.html"><tt>\framebox</tt></a>
- but has an extra argument which specifies the width of each
- dash. A dashed box looks best when the width and height are multiples
- of the dash length.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-43.html">Picture Environment</A><br>
-See also <a href="ltx-237.html"><tt>\framebox</tt></a><br>
-Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Dec 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-217.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-217.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 0878ebe1c95..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-217.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,22 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \date</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\date</font></h1>
-<p>
- <tt>\date{text}</tt>
-<p>
- The <tt>\date</tt> command declares <tt>text</tt>
- to be the document's date. With no
- <tt>\date</tt> command, the current date is used.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-131.html">Page Styles</A>,
- <A href="ltx-263.html"><tt>\maketitle</tt></A><br>
-See also <a href="ltx-330.html"><tt>\today</tt></a><br>
-Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 17 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-218.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-218.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 3b4394dae9a..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-218.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,25 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \ddots</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\ddots</font></h1>
-<p>
- The <tt>\ddots</tt> command produces a diagonal ellipsis.<br>
- Can be used only in math mode.
-<p>
-See also:
-<ul>
-<li><A href="ltx-207.html">\cdots</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-256.html">\ldots</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-340.html">\vdots</A>
-<p>
-<li><A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>,
-<li><A href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</A>.
-</ul>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 25 April 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-22.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-22.html
deleted file mode 100644
index cba6bef116a..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-22.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,46 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX Document Styles</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Document Styles</font></h1>
-<p>
- Valid LaTeX document styles include:
- <ul>
- <li><I>article</I>
- <li><I>report</I>
- <li><I>letter</I>
- <li><I>book</I>
- </ul>
- They are selected with the following command:
-<p>
- <tt>\documentstyle[options]{style}</tt>
-<p>
- The options for the different styles are:
-<ol>
- <li>article: 11pt, 12pt, twoside, twocolumn, draft, fleqn, leqno,
- acm
- <li>report: 11pt, 12pt, twoside, twocolumn, draft, fleqn, leqno, acm
- <li>letter: 11pt, 12pt, fleqn, leqno, acm
- <li>book: 11pt, 12pt, twoside,twocolumn, draft, fleqn, leqno
-</ol>
- If you specify more than one option, they must be separated by a
- comma.
-<hr>
-Related topics:
-<ul>
-<li><A href="ltx-227.html">\flushbottom</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-284.html">\onecolumn</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-299.html">\raggedbottom</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-332.html">\twocolumn</A>
-</ul>
-See also <a href="ltx-169.html">starting and ending</a><br>
-The <tt>\documentstyle</tt>
-command has been changed in <a href="versions.html">LaTeX2e</a><br>
-<p>
-Go to <A href="ltx-177.html">Typeface Styles</A><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 7 Jul 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-220.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-220.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 7f3e2e56643..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-220.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \dotfill</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\dotfill</font></h1>
-<p>
- The <tt>\dotfill</tt> command produces a
- <a href="ltx-86.html#rubber">rubber length</a> that produces dots
- instead of just spaces.
-<hr>
-See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 23 Oct 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-221.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-221.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 47de00fca4c..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-221.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,19 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \em</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\em</font></h1>
-<p>
- Emphasis (toggles between <tt>\it</tt> and <tt>\rm</tt>).
-<p>
-This is version 2.09; see also
- <a href="fonts2e.html">LaTeX2e font selection</a>,
- <a href="emph.html"><tt>\emph</tt></a>
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>,
- <A href="ltx-177.html">Styles</A><br>
-See also <a href="boldmath.html"><tt>\boldmath</tt></a><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 May 1995.
-</address></body></html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-222.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-222.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 59eb551e8b6..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-222.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,52 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX enumerate</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">enumerate</font></h1>
-<p>
-<p><pre>
- \begin{enumerate}
- \item First item
- \item Second item
- ....
- \end{enumerate}
-</pre>
-<p>
- The enumerate environment produces a numbered list. Enumerations can
- be nested within one another, up to four levels deep. They can also
- be nested within other paragraph-making environments.
-<p>
-There must be at least one <tt>\item</tt> command within the environment.
-<p>
- Each item of an enumerated list begins with an
- <a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a> command. The optional <tt>label</tt>
- argument of the <tt>\item</tt> command, if given, suppresses incrementing
- the <a href="ltx-3.html">counter</a>. If not given the default labels are
- taken from the counters, <tt>enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv</tt> for the
- four allowed levels of nesting, respectively.
-<p>
-<a name="example">The</a> numbering style for the enumeration is determined by
-the commands, <tt>\labelenumi</tt>, <tt>\labelenumii</tt>, etc., for
-the nested levels. These may be redefined with the
-<a href="ltx-18.html"><tt>\renewcommand</tt></a> command.
-<p>
-For example, to use upper case letters for the first level and lower
-case letters for the second level of enumeration:
-<pre>
- <tt>\renewcommand{\labelenumi}{<a href="ltx-199.html">\Alph</a>{enumi}}
- \renewcommand{\labelenumii}{<a href="ltx-199.html">\alph</a>{enumii}}</tt>
-</pre>
-<hr>
-
-See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>,
- <a href="lists.html">Lists</a>,
- <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a><br>
-See also <a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Thanks to Robert Biddle, Robert.Biddle@Comp.VUW.AC.NZ, for info on
-the <tt>\labelenumi</tt> commands.<br>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 10 Oct 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-223.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-223.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 7d5200b374a..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-223.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,50 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX eqnarray</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">eqnarray</font></h1>
-<p>
-<p><pre>
- <tt>\begin{eqnarray[*]}
- var_1 & rel_1 & eq1 \\
- var_2 & rel_2 & eq2 \\
- ....
- \end{eqnarray[*]}</tt>
-</pre>
-
- The eqnarray environment is typically used to display a sequence of equations
- or inequalities; it may also be used to manage spacing for long equations.
- The <a href="lefteqn.html"><tt>\lefteqn</tt></a> command is useful in
- this environment for splitting long equations over several lines.
-<p>
- It is very much like a three-column
- <a href="ltx-202.html">array environment</a>, with position argument <tt>rcl</tt>,
- i.e., the columns are justified right, center, and left, respectively.
- (However, <a href="ltx-268.html"><tt>\multicolumn</tt></a> may not be used.)
-<p>
- Consecutive rows are separated by <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a>
- commands and consecutive items within a
- row separated by an <tt>&amp;</tt>. Any item may be empty, i.e., no text.
-<p>
- A separate equation number is placed on every
- line unless that line has a <tt>\nonumber</tt> command.
- The optional <tt>eqnarray*</tt> form does not generate any equation numbers.
-<p>
- A <a href="ltx-252.html"><tt>\label</tt></a> command anywhere within a
- row generates a reference to that row's number.
-<hr>
-Related topics
-<ul>
-<li><A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>
-<li><a href="ltx-130.html">LaTeX Modes</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-202.html">Array Environment</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-224.html">Equation Environment</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-421.html">Displaymath Environment</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a>
-</ul>
-Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 26 Jun 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-224.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-224.html
deleted file mode 100644
index c007e0430da..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-224.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,35 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX equation</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">equation</font></h1>
-<pre>
- \begin{equation}
- math formula
- \label{eqno1}
- \end{equation}
-</pre>
-
- The equation environment centers your equation on the page and places
- the equation number in the right margin.
-<p>
- The <a href="ltx-252.html"><tt>\label</tt></a> command is required
- only if you want to use a <a href="ltx-303.html"><tt>\ref</tt></a>
- command to refer to the number assigned to this equation.
-<p>
-The <a href="ltx-421.html">Display Math</a> environment gives the
-same effect without the equation number.
-<hr>
-Related topics
-<ul>
-<li><A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>
-<li><a href="ltx-130.html">LaTeX Modes</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-223.html">Eqnarray Environment</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a>
-</ul>
-Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 31 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-225.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-225.html
deleted file mode 100644
index e7b032ab3ba..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-225.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,45 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX figure</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">figure</font></h1>
-<p>
-<p><pre>
- <tt>\begin{figure}[placement]
-
- body of the figure
-
- <a href="caption.html">\caption</a>{figure title}
- \end{figure}</tt>
-</pre>
-
- Figures are objects that are not part of the normal text, and are
- usually "floated" to a convenient place, like the top of a page.
- Figures will not be split between two pages.
-<p>
- The optional argument [placement] determines where LaTeX will try to
- place your figure. There are four places where LaTeX can possibly put
- a float:
-<ul>
-<li><TT>h</TT> Here - at the position in the text where the figure
- environment appears.
-<li><TT>t</TT> Top - at the top of a text page.
-<li><TT>b</TT> Bottom - at the bottom of a text page.
-<li><TT>p</TT> Page of floats - on a separate float page, which is a page
- containing no text, only floats.
-</ul>
- The standard report and article styles use the default placement tbp.
-<p>
- The body of the figure is made up of whatever text, LaTeX commands,
- etc., you wish. The
- <a href="caption.html"><tt>\caption</tt></a>
- command allows you to title your figure.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>,
- <a href="ltx-43.html">Picture</a><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 12 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-226.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-226.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 3becd1a50ff..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-226.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,26 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \fbox</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\fbox</font></h1>
-<p>
- <tt>\fbox{text}</tt>
-<p>
-
- The <tt>\fbox</tt> command is exactly the same as the
- <a href="ltx-265.html"><tt>\mbox</tt></a> command, except
- that it puts a rectangular frame around the outside of the box
- that it creates.
-<p>
- The <tt>\fbox</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">robust</a>.
-<hr>
-See <tt><a href="ltx-237.html">\framebox</a></tt>,
- <tt><a href="ltx-265.html">\mbox</a></tt><br>
-See also <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 8 Aug 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-227.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-227.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 9641d7baa84..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-227.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \flushbottom</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\flushbottom</font></h1>
- The <tt>\flushbottom</tt> declaration makes all text pages the same height,
- adding extra vertical space when necessary to fill out the page.
-
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-22.html">Document Styles</a><br>
-See also <a href="ltx-299.html"><tt>\raggedbottom</tt></a><br>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 28 Jun 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-228.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-228.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 72224f71389..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-228.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,29 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX flushleft</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">flushleft</font></h1>
-<p>
-<p><pre>
- \begin{flushleft}
- Text on line 1 \\
- Text on line 2 \\
- ....
- ....
- \end{flushleft}
-</pre>
- The flushleft environment allows you to create a paragraph consisting
- of lines that are flushed left to the left-hand margin. Each line
- must be terminated with a
- <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a>.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>,
- <a href="ltx-29.html">Center</a>, <a href="ltx-229.html">Flushright</a><br>
-See also <a href="ltx-301.html"><tt>\raggedright</tt></a><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jun 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-229.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-229.html
deleted file mode 100644
index bd65c969c83..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-229.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX flushright</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">flushright</font></h1>
-
-<p><pre>
- \begin{flushright}
- Text on line 1 \\
- Text on line 2 \\
- ...
- ...
- \end{flushright}
-</pre>
- The flushright environment allows you to create a paragraph consisting
- of lines that are flushed right to the right-hand margin. Each line
- must be terminated with a <tt><a href="ltx-181.html">\\</a></tt>.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>,
- <a href="ltx-29.html">Center</a>, <a href="ltx-228.html">Flushleft</a><br>
-See also <a href="ltx-300.html"><tt>\raggedleft</tt></a><br>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jun 1995.
-</address>
-</body></html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-230.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-230.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 03784b5af2b..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-230.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,26 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \fnsymbol</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\fnsymbol</font></h1>
-
- <tt>\fnsymbol{counter}</tt>
-<p>
- The <tt>\fnsymbol</tt> command causes the current value of <tt>counter</tt>
- to be printed in
- a specific sequence of nine symbols that can be used for numbering
- footnotes. (The sequence is asterisk, dagger, double dagger, section
- mark, paragraph mark, double vertical lines, double asterisks, double
- daggers, double double daggers.)
-<p>
- The value of <tt>counter</tt> must be less between 1 and 9.
-<p>
- Can be used <strong>only</strong> in math mode.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-3.html">Counters</A><br>
-Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 03 Nov 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-231.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-231.html
deleted file mode 100644
index a27bb00fc67..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-231.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,31 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \footnote</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\footnote</font></h1>
- <tt>\footnote[num]{text}</tt>
- The <tt>\footnote</tt> command places a numbered footnote at the bottom
- of the current page containing the contents of the argument, <tt>text</tt>.
- The optional argument, <tt>num</tt>, is used to change
- the default footnote number. This command can only be used in outer
- paragraph mode.
-<p>
- If <tt>num</tt> is not specified, the footnote
- <a href="ltx-3.html">counter</a> is incremented and its value is used.
-<p>
- Note that <tt>num</tt> is specified as a positive integer even if
- the footnote <a href="ltx-3.html">counter</a> has been set to use letters
- or roman numerals.
-<p>
-This command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile.</a>
-<hr>
-See also: <A href="ltx-82.html">Footnotes</A>,
- <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a><br>
-See also <a href="ltx-232.html"><tt>\footnotemark</tt></a> and
- <a href="ltx-234.html"><tt>\footnotetext</tt></a><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: RBS, 5 February 1997.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-232.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-232.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 80680af1eb1..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-232.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,28 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \footnotemark</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\footnotemark</font></h1>
-<tt>\footnotemark[num]</tt>
-<p>
- The <tt>\footnotemark[num]</tt> command puts the footnote number in the text.
- It is used in conjunction with <a href="ltx-234.html"><tt>\footnotetext</tt></a>
- to produce footnotes where <a href="ltx-231.html"><tt>\footnote</tt></a>
- cannot be used
-<p>
- If <tt>num</tt> is not given the footnote <a href="ltx-3.html">counter</a>
- is incremented and used.
-<p>
-This command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile.</a>
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-82.html">Footnotes</A>,
-<a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a><br>
-See also <tt><A href="ltx-231.html">\footnote</A></tt>
- <tt><A href="ltx-234.html">\footnotetext</A></tt><br>
-Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-233.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-233.html
deleted file mode 100644
index b2b769e4ab6..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-233.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,16 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \footnotesize</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\footnotesize</font></h1>
- Third smallest of 10 typefaces available. This is the default size
- for footnotes.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>,
- <A href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</A><br>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 28 Jun 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-234.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-234.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 8a5557b3904..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-234.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,31 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \footnotetext</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\footnotetext</font></h1>
- <tt>\footnotetext[num]{text}</tt>
-<p>
-
- The <tt>\footnotetext</tt> command is used in conjunction with the
- <a href="ltx-232.html"><tt>\footnotemark</tt></a> command and
- places the <tt>text</tt> in the argument at the bottom
- of the page. This command can come anywhere after the
- <a href="ltx-232.html"><tt>\footnotemark</tt></a>
- command.
-<p>
- The optional argument, number, is used to change the default footnote
- number.
- Otherwise, the footnote counter is not changed.
-<p>
-This command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile.</a>
-<hr>
-See also: <A href="ltx-82.html">Footnotes</A>,
- <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a><br>
-See also <tt><A href="ltx-231.html">\footnote</A></tt>,
- <tt><A href="ltx-232.html">\footnotemark</A></tt><br>
-Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-235.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-235.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 660f12331fb..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-235.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,21 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \frac</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\frac</font></h1>
- <tt>\frac{num}{den}</tt>
-<p>
-
- The <tt>\frac</tt> command produces the fraction num divided by den,
- placing the numerator over a horizontal line (solidus) and the
- denominator below.
-
-<hr>
-See also: <A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>,
- <A href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</A><br>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 15 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-236.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-236.html
deleted file mode 100644
index e383c0fa223..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-236.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,21 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \frame</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\frame</font></h1>
-<pre>\frame{ ... }
-</pre>
-
- The <tt>\frame</tt> command puts a rectangular frame around the object
- specified in the argument. The reference point is the bottom left
- corner of the frame. No extra space is put between the frame and the
- object.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-43.html">Picture Environment</A><br>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 27 Sep 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-237.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-237.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 4ccb4121dab..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-237.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,37 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \framebox</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\framebox</font></h1>
-<h2>Normal use</h2>
- <tt>\framebox[width][position]{text}</tt>
-<p>
- The <tt>\framebox</tt> command is exactly the same as the
- <a href="ltx-262.html"><tt>\makebox</tt></a> command,
- except that it puts a frame around the outside of the box that it
- creates.
-<p>
- The framebox command produces a rule of thickness <tt>\fboxrule,</tt> and
- leaves a space <tt>\fboxsep</tt> between the rule and the contents of the box.
-<p>
- The <tt>\framebox</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>.
-
-<h2>In picture environment</h2>
-<tt>\framebox(width,height)[position]{...}</tt>
-<p>
- The <tt>\framebox</tt> command is exactly the same as the
- <a href="ltx-262.html"><tt>\makebox</tt></a> command,
- except that it puts a frame around the outside of the box that it
- creates.
-<hr>
- See also <tt><a href="ltx-226.html">\fbox</a></tt>,
- <tt><a href="ltx-262.html">\makebox</a></tt>,
- <tt><a href="ltx-216.html">\dashbox</a></tt><br>
- See also <A href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</A>,
- <A href="ltx-43.html">Picture Environment</A>.<br>
- Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>.
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Dec 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-238.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-238.html
deleted file mode 100644
index d2b610d8a4d..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-238.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \hfill</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\hfill</font></h1>
-<p>
- The <tt>\hfill</tt> fill command produces a
- <a href="ltx-86.html#rubber">rubber length</a> which can stretch or
- shrink horizontally. It will be filled with spaces. It is equivalent
- to <tt><a href="ltx-241.html">\hspace</a>\fill</tt>.
-<hr>
-See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 23 Oct 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-239.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-239.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 0aa58a30d9b..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-239.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \hline</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\hline</font></h1>
- The <tt>\hline</tt> command will draw a horizontal line the width of the table.
- It's most commonly used to draw a line at the top, bottom, and between
- the rows of the table.
-<p>
- Two successive <tt>\hline</tt> commands leave a space between the
- lines; this space does <strong>not</strong> contain the vertical lines
- specified by <tt>|</tt> characters in the <tt>col</tt> argument of the
- <a href="ltx-68.html"><tt>\begin{tabular}{col}</tt></a> command.
-<p>
- To place a line at the bottom of a table, the <tt>\hline</tt> command
- must follow a <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a> (line break) command
- after the last table entry. This final line break command should be
- present <strong>only</strong> in this circumstance.
-<hr>
-See also <a href="ltx-202.html">array</a>,
-<A href="ltx-68.html">tabular</A>.<br>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 22 Jun 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-240.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-240.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 9211fcf1f59..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-240.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,16 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \hrulefill</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\hrulefill</font></h1>
-<p>
- The <tt>\hrulefill</tt> fill command produces a
- <a href="ltx-86.html#rubber">rubber length</a> which can stretch
- or shrink horizontally. It will be filled with a horizontal rule.
-<hr>
-See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 23 Oct 1995.
-</address>
-</body></html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-241.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-241.html
deleted file mode 100644
index bbf4f38e56c..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-241.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \hspace</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\hspace</font></h1>
-<p>
- <tt>\hspace[*]{len}</tt>
-<p>
-
- The <tt>\hspace</tt> command adds horizontal space. The length of the space
- <tt>len</tt>
- can be expressed in any terms that LaTeX understands, i.e., points,
- inches, etc. You can add negative as well as positive space with an
- <tt>\hspace</tt> command. Adding negative space is like backspacing.
-<p>
-
- LaTeX removes horizontal space that comes at the end of a line. If
- you don't want LaTeX to remove this space, include the optional *
- argument. Then the space is never removed.
-<hr>
-See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a>,
- <a href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</a><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 10 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body></html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-242.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-242.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 8f78e1596da..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-242.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,15 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \huge</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\huge</font></h1>
- Second largest of 10 typefaces available.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>,
- <A href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</A><br>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 28 Jun 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-243.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-243.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 2b38b714c47..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-243.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,14 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \Huge (capital "h")</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\Huge (capital "h")</font></h1>
- Largest of 10 typefaces available. All fonts may not be available in
- this size.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>,
- <A href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</A><br>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 28 Jun 1995.
-</address></body></html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-244.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-244.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 37e02cc1172..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-244.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,30 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \hyphenation</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\hyphenation</font></h1>
-<p>
- <tt>\hyphenation{words}</tt>
-<p>
- The <tt>\hyphenation</tt> command declares allowed hyphenation points, where
- words is a list of words, separated by spaces, in which each
- hyphenation point is indicated by a - character. For example
-<pre>
- <tt>\hyphenation{fortran,er-go-no-mic}</tt></pre>
-indicates that "fortran" cannot be hyphenated and indicates allowed
-hyphenation points for "ergonomic".
-<p>
-This argument to this command should contain words composed only of normal
-letters. To suggest hyphenation points for strings containing nonletters
-or <a href="ltx-401.html">accented letters</a>, use
-the <a href="ltx-182.html"><tt>\-</tt></a> command in the input text.
-<p>
-This command is normally given in the <a href="input.html#structure">preamble</a>.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</A><br>
-Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jun 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-245.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-245.html
deleted file mode 100644
index ee636285985..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-245.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,31 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \include</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\include</font></h1>
- <tt>\include{file}</tt>
-<p>
- The <tt>\include</tt> command is used in conjunction with the
- <tt><a href="ltx-246.html">\includeonly</a></tt>
- command for selective inclusion of files. The <tt>file</tt> argument is the
- first name of a file, denoting <tt>file.tex</tt>. If the file is also
- in the file list of the <tt>\includeonly</tt> command or if there is no
- <tt>\includeonly</tt> command, the <tt>\include</tt> command is equivalent to
-<Pre>
- <tt><a href="ltx-213.html">\clearpage</a> \input{file} <a href="ltx-213.html">\clearpage</a></tt>
-</Pre>
- except that if the file <tt>file.tex</tt> does not exist, then a warning
- message rather than an error is produced. If the file is not in the
- file list, the <tt>\include</tt> command is equivalent to <tt>\clearpage</tt>.
-<p>
- The <tt>\include</tt> command may not appear in the preamble or in a file read
- by another <tt>\include</tt> command.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-165.html">Splitting the Input</A><br>
-See also <a href="ltx-248.html"><tt>\input</tt></a><br>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 30 Oct 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-246.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-246.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 08951cd0f9b..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-246.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \includeonly</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\includeonly</font></h1>
- <tt>\includeonly{file_list}</tt>
-<p>
- The <tt>\includeonly</tt> command controls which files will be read in by an
- <a href="ltx-245.html"><tt>\include</tt></a> command.
- It can only appear in the preamble.
-<hr>
-See also: <A href="ltx-165.html">Splitting the Input</A><br>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 28 Jun 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-247.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-247.html
deleted file mode 100644
index dc52f57e073..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-247.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,19 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \indent</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\indent</font></h1>
- This produces a horizontal space whose width equals the width of the
- paragraph indentation
- (<a href="ltx-86.html#lencmd"><tt>\parindent</tt></a>).
- It is used to add paragraph indentation where
- it would otherwise be suppressed.
-<hr>
-See also <a href="ltx-280.html"><tt>\noindent</tt></a><br>
-See also <A href="ltx-111.html">Making Paragraphs</A><br>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jun 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-248.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-248.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 0de0c73f47a..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-248.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,21 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \input</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\input</font></h1>
- <tt>\input{file}</tt>
-<p>
- The <tt>\input</tt> command causes the indicated <tt>file</tt>
- to be read and processed,
- exactly as if its contents had been inserted in the current file at
- that point. The file name may be a complete file name with extension
- or just a first name, in which case the file <tt>file.tex</tt> is used.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-165.html">Splitting the Input</A><br>
-See also <A href="ltx-245.html"><tt>\include</tt></A><br>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 30 Oct 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-249.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-249.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 18c1d92a31e..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-249.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \it</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\it</font></h1>
-<p>
- Italics typeface.
-<p>
-This is version 2.09; see also
- <a href="fonts2e.html">LaTeX2e font selection</a><br>
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>,
- <A href="ltx-177.html">Styles</A><br>
-See also <a href="boldmath.html"><tt>\boldmath</tt></a><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 May 1995.
-</address></body></html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-250.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-250.html
deleted file mode 100644
index c8e7d40c39b..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-250.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,41 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX itemize</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">itemize</font></h1>
-<pre>
- <tt>\begin{itemize}
- \item First item
- \item Second item
- ....
- \end{itemize}</tt>
-</pre>
-
- The itemize environment produces a list with "tick-marks" (typically
- "bullets" for first level). Itemizations can be
- nested within one another, up to four levels deep.
-<p>
- Each item of an itemized list begins with an
- <a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a> command. There
- must be at least one <tt>\item</tt> command within the environment.
-<p>
-The default optional
-<tt>label</tt> argument of the <a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a> command
-is given by the <tt>\labelitemi, \labelitemii, \labelitemiii, \labelitemiv</tt>
-commands, respectively, depending on the nesting level.
-These may be redefined with the <a href="ltx-18.html"><tt>\renewcommand</tt></a>
-command. For example, to make the first level marks nice five-point stars,
-<pre>
- <tt>\renewcommand{\labelitemi}{$<a href="ltx-404.html">\star</a>$}</tt>
-</pre>
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>,
- <a href="lists.html">Lists</a>,
- <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a><br>
-See also <a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a><br>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 18 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-251.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-251.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 8ad9d646231..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-251.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,22 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \kill</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\kill</font></h1>
- The <tt>\kill</tt> command allows you to set tab stops without producing text.
- It works just like the
- <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a> except
- that it throws away the current line
- instead of producing output for it. The effect of any
- <a href="ltx-187.html"><tt>\=</tt></a>,
- <a href="ltx-190.html"><tt>\+</tt></a> or
- <a href="ltx-182.html"><tt>\-</tt></a>
- commands in that line remain in effect.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-58.html">Tabbing</A> Environment<br>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-252.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-252.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 3e70e99f308..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-252.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,48 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \label</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\label</font></h1>
-<p>
- <tt>\label{key}</tt>
-<p>
-
- A <tt>\label</tt> command appearing in ordinary text assigns to the
- <tt>key</tt> the
- number of the current sectional unit; one appearing inside a numbered
- environment assigns that number to the <tt>key</tt>.
-<p>
- A <tt>key</tt> can consist of any sequence of letters, digits, or punctuation
- characters. Upper- and lowercase letters are different.
-<p>
- The number assigned to the key can be accessed by use of the
- <a href="ltx-303.html"><tt>\ref</tt></a> command. For example,
-<pre>
- \begin{equation} ....
- ....
- \label{eq:no1}
- \end{equation}
- ...
- One can see from Eq.~(\ref{eq:no1}) that ...
-</pre>
-<p>
-In a <a href="ltx-67.html">table</a> or <a href="ltx-225.html">figure</a>
-environment, the <tt>\label</tt> command should follow the
-<a href="caption.html"><tt>\caption</tt></a> command (or be part of its
-argument) since it is the <tt>\caption</tt> command which generates the
-number.
-<p>
-The <tt>\label</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a> but it
-can be used in the argument of a
-<a href="ltx-141.html">sectioning command</a> or
-<a href="caption.html"><tt>\caption</tt></a> command.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-13.html">Cross References</A><br>
-See also <a href="ltx-303.html"><tt>\ref</tt></a>,
- <a href="ltx-291.html"><tt>\pageref</tt></a> <br>
-Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-253.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-253.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 9413e7a7f59..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-253.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,15 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \large</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\large</font></h1>
- Slightly larger than default typeface size.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>,
- <A href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</A><br>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-254.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-254.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 6a981aa4a57..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-254.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,16 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \Large (capital "l")</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\Large (capital "l")</font></h1>
- Fourth largest of typefaces available. Is generally the default for
- titles.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>,
- <A href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</A><br>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-255.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-255.html
deleted file mode 100644
index d1d96f9c62a..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-255.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,14 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \LARGE (all caps)</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\LARGE (all caps)</font></h1>
- Third largest of typefaces available.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>,
- <A href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</A><br>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995.
-</address>
-</body></html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-256.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-256.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 5ba330fb9fc..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-256.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,25 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \ldots</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\ldots</font></h1>
- The <tt>\ldots</tt> command produces an ellipsis.<br>
- Unlike <tt>\cdots, \ddots, \vdots,</tt>
- this command works in any mode, not just math mode.
-<p>
-See also:
-<ul>
- <li><A href="ltx-207.html">\cdots</A>
- <li><A href="ltx-218.html">\ddots</A>
- <li><A href="ltx-340.html">\vdots</A>
-<p>
- <li><A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>,
- <li><A href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</A>.
-</ul>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 25 April 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-257.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-257.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 616a63de4f0..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-257.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,29 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \line</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\line</font></h1>
-<p>
- <tt>\line(x-slope,y-slope){length}</tt>
-<p>
- The <tt>\line</tt> command draws a line of the specified length and slope.
-<p>
-The slope is determined by <tt>(x-slope,y-slope)</tt> which are signed
-integers of magnitude less than or equal to 6 and which have no common
-divisor except for plus or minus one; For example (1,0) is a horizontal
-line; (1,1) gives a slope of
-45 degress; (0,1) is a vertical line; (-1,1) is 135 degrees.
-<p>
-The <strong>horizontal</strong> extent of the line is given by the
-<tt>length</tt> parameter, except in the case of a vertical line in
-which case <tt>length</tt> specifies the vertical height.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>,
- <A href="ltx-43.html">picture</A><br>
-See also <a href="ltx-341.html"><tt>\vector</tt></a><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 12 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-258.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-258.html
deleted file mode 100644
index ef7125b06bf..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-258.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,25 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \linebreak</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\linebreak</font></h1>
-<p>
- <tt>\linebreak[number]</tt>
-<p>
- The <tt>\linebreak</tt> command tells LaTeX to break the current line at the
- point of the command. With the optional argument, number, you can
- convert the <tt>\linebreak</tt> command from a demand to a request. The number
- must be a number from 0 to 4. The higher the number, the more
- insistent the request is.
-<p>
- The <tt>\linebreak</tt> command causes LaTeX to stretch the line so it extends
- to the right margin.
-<p>
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</A><br>
-Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-259.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-259.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 9bce5892257..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-259.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,20 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \linethickness</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\linethickness</font></h1>
- <tt>\linethickness{dimension}</tt>
-<p>
- Declares the thickness of horizontal and vertical lines in a picture
- environment to be dimension, which must be a positive length. It does
- not affect the thickness of slanted lines and circles, or the quarter
- circles drawn by <tt>\oval</tt> to form the corners of an oval.
-<hr>
-See also: <A href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</A>,
- <A href="ltx-43.html">Picture Environment</A><br>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-260.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-260.html
deleted file mode 100644
index f89f998f05c..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-260.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,95 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX list enviroment</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">list</font></h1>
-<p>
-<p><pre>
- <tt>\begin{list}{label}{spacing}
- \item First item
- \item Second item
- ....
- \end{list}</tt>
-</pre>
- The <tt>label</tt> argument specifies the <em>default</em> label for items
- in the list; it may be overriden with the optional argument of the
- <a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a> command. It is
- a piece of text that is inserted in a box to form the
- label. This argument can and usually does contain other LaTeX
- commands.
-<p>
- The <tt>spacing</tt> argument contains commands to change the spacing
- parameters for the list. This argument will most often be null, i.e.
- <tt>{}</tt>. This will select default spacings, which depends on the
- <a href="ltx-22.html">document style</a> and options, and
- which should suffice for
- most cases. However, the commands which can be put here are
-<ul>
-<li><tt>\topsep</tt> amount of extra vertical space at top of list
-<li><tt>\partopsep</tt> extra length at top if environment is prececed
- by a blank line (it should be a <a href="ltx-86.html#rubber">rubber length</a>)
-<li><tt>\itemsep</tt> amount of extra vertical space between items
-<li><tt>\parsep</tt> amount of vertical space between paragraphs <em>within</em>
- an item
-<li><tt>\leftmargin</tt> horizontal distance between the left margins of
- the environment and the list; must be nonnegative
-<li><tt>\rightmargin</tt> horizontal distance betwen the right margins of
- the enviroment and the list; must be nonnegative
-<li><tt>\listparindent</tt> amount of extra space for paragraph indent <em>after
- the first</em> in an item; can be negative
-<li><tt>\itemindent</tt> indentation of first line of an item; can be negative
-<li><tt>\labelsep</tt> separation between end of the box containing the label
- and the text of the first line of an item
-<li><tt>\labelwidth</tt> normal width of the box containing the label; if the
- actual label is bigger, the natural width is used, extending into the
- space for the first line of the item's text
-<li><tt>\makelabel{label}</tt> generates the label printed by the
- <tt>\item</tt> command
-<p>
-<li><a href="ltx-338.html"><tt>\usecounter{ctr}</tt></a>
- enables the counter <tt>ctr</tt> to be used
- for numbering items; it is initialized to zero and stepped when
- executing an <tt>\item</tt> command that has no optional <tt>label</tt>
- argument.
-</ul>
-
-<h2><a name="example">An Example</a></h2>
-An simple example of things that can be done with the List Enviroment
-will illustrate typical usage of the arguments. The following will
-make a list numbered by "Item-#", where the # is an upper case
-Roman numeral, and will indent the right margin the same
-as the left margin (it is not normally indented in most styles).
-<pre>
- <tt>% define "Lcount" as a counter
- <a href="ltx-271.html">\newcounter</a>{Lcount}
- % set the "default" label to print counter as a Roman numeral
- \begin{list}{Item-<a href="ltx-305.html">\Roman</a>{Lcount}}
- % inform the list command to use this counter
- {<a href="ltx-338.html">\usecounter</a>{Lcount}
- % set rightmargin equal to leftmargin
- <a href="ltx-88.html">\setlength</a>{\rightmargin}{\leftmargin}}
- % we can now begin the "items"
- <a href="item.html">\item</a> This is the first item
- \item And this is the second item
- \end{list}</tt>
-</pre>
-Note that this would produce something like:
-<pre>
- Item-I This is the first item
- Item-II And this is the second item
-</pre>
-<hr>
-See <a href="lists.html">Lists</a>,
- <a href="ltx-27.html">Environments</a>,
- <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a>,
- <a href="ltx-86.html">Lenghts</a><br>
-See also <a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 23 Oct 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
-
-
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-261.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-261.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 5800bce00e1..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-261.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \location</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\location</font></h1>
- <tt>\location{address}</tt>
-<p>
- This modifies your organization's standard address. This only appears
- if the firstpage pagestyle is selected.
-<hr>
-See also: <A href="ltx-91.html">Letters</A><br>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 23 Jun 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-262.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-262.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 074fa60fdc8..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-262.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,62 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \makebox</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\makebox</font></h1>
-<h2>Normal use</h2>
- <tt>\makebox[width][position]{text}</tt>
-<p>
- The <tt>\makebox</tt> command creates a box to contain the specified
- <tt>text</tt>. The
- width of the box may be specified by the optional <tt>width</tt> argument.
- The <tt>text</tt> in the box is set in LR mode.
-<p>
- If the optional <tt>width</tt> argument is used, the optional
- <tt>position</tt> argument may also be used to specify the position of
- <tt>text</tt> within the box as follows:
-<ul>
-<li><tt>l</tt> - flushleft
-<li><tt>r</tt> - flushright
-<li><tt>s</tt> - interword space adjusted so <tt>text</tt> fills box exactly
-</ul>
-The default horizontal and vertical positioning (if the second optional
-argument is omitted) is to center <tt>text</tt>
-in the box.
-<p>
-Note that <tt>text</tt> may overflow the box, in which case it is
-typeset on top of the adjacent text. While this is generally undesirable,
-it can also be used to create special effects.
-<p>
-The <tt>\makebox</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>.
-<p>
-See <tt><a href="ltx-265.html">\mbox</a></tt>,
- <tt><a href="ltx-237.html">\framebox</a></tt><br>
-See also: <A href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</A>.
-
-<h2>In picture environment</h2>
- <tt>\makebox(width,height)[position]{ ... }</tt>
-<p>
- The <tt>\makebox</tt> command for the picture environment is similar to the
- normal <tt>\makebox</tt> command except that you must specify a width and
- height (note that these are in parentheses) in multiples of
- <a href="unitlength.html"><tt>\unitlength</tt></a>.
-<p>
- The optional argument, <tt>position</tt>, specifies the quadrant that your
- text appears in. You may select up to two of the following:
-<ul>
-<li><TT>t</TT> Moves the item to the top of the rectangle
-<li><TT>b</TT> Moves the item to the bottom
-<li><TT>l</TT> Moves the item to the left
-<li><TT>r</TT> Moves the item to the right
-</ul>
-The default horizontal and vertical positioning is to center <tt>text</tt>
-in the box.
-<hr>
-See also <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a>,
- <A href="ltx-43.html">Picture Environment</A><br>
-Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Dec 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-263.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-263.html
deleted file mode 100644
index b1760e41993..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-263.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,33 +0,0 @@
-<html><head><title>Help On LaTeX \maketitle</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\maketitle</font></h1>
- <tt>\maketitle</tt>
-<p>
- The <tt>\maketitle</tt> command generates a title on a separate title page -
- except in the article style, where the title normally goes at the top
- of the first page. Information used to produce the title is obtained
- from the following declarations, which should precede the
- <tt>\maketitle</tt> command.
-<ul>
-<li><A href="ltx-203.html"><tt>\author</tt></A>
-<li><A href="ltx-217.html"><tt>\date</tt></A>
-<li><A href="ltx-324.html"><tt>\thanks</tt></A>
-<li><A href="ltx-329.html"><tt>\title</tt></A>
-</ul>
-<p>
-The <a href="ltx-78.html">Titlepage Environment</a>
-allows you to design your own title page, rather than using that
-created by the <tt>\maketitle</tt> command whose format is determined
-by the <a href="ltx-22.html">document style</a>.
-.
-<hr>
-See also: <A href="ltx-131.html">Page Styles</A>,
- <a href="ltx-78.html">Titlepage Environment</a><br>
-Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 Nov 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-264.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-264.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 8395d8863f1..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-264.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,33 +0,0 @@
-<html><head>
-<title>Help On LaTeX \markboth \markright</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\markboth \markright</font></h1>
-<p>
- <tt>\markboth{left head}{right head}</tt>
-<p>
- <tt> \markright{right head}</tt>
-<p>
-
- The <tt>\markboth</tt> and <tt>\markright</tt>
- commands are used in conjunction with the
- page style myheadings for setting either both or just the right
- heading. In addition to their use with the myheadings page style, you
- can use them to override the normal headings in the headings style,
- since LaTeX uses these same commands to generate those heads. You
- should note that a left-hand heading is generated by the last
- <tt>\markboth</tt> command before the end of the page, while a right-hand
- heading is generated by the first <tt>\markboth</tt> or <tt>\markright</tt>
- that comes
- on the page if there is one, otherwise by the last one before the
- page.
-<hr>
-See also: <A href="ltx-131.html">Page Styles</A>,
-<A href="ltx-138.html"><tt>\pagestyle</tt></A>.<br>
-Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 17 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-265.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-265.html
deleted file mode 100644
index d4d1b8a3a8d..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-265.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,35 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \mbox</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\mbox</font></h1>
-<p>
- <tt>\mbox{text}</tt>
-<p>
-
- The <tt>\mbox</tt> command creates a box just wide enough to hold the
- <tt>text</tt> in its argument. The <tt>text</tt> in the box is in LR
- <a href="ltx-130.html">mode</a> which prevents it from being broken across
- lines.
-<p>
- The <a href="ltx-262.html"><tt>\makebox</tt></a> command is similar
- except that it allows you to specify a width which is not necessarily
- the natural width of the <tt>text</tt> and also to specify the placement
- within the box.
-<p>
-An <tt>\mbox</tt> within <a href="ltx-130.html">math mode</a> does
-<strong>not</strong> use the current <a href="mathfonts.html">math font</a>;
-rather it uses the <a href="ltx-176.html">typeface</a> of the surrounding
-running text.
-<p>
-The <tt>\mbox</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">robust</a>.
-<hr>
-See <a href="ltx-226.html"><tt>\fbox</tt></a>,
- <a href="ltx-262.html"><tt>\makebox</tt></a><br>
-See also <A href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</A><br>
-Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 8 Aug 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-266.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-266.html
deleted file mode 100644
index d6c56fb7ec8..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-266.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \medskip</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\medskip</font></h1>
-<p>
- The <tt>\medskip</tt> command is equivalent to
- <tt><a href="ltx-347.html">\vspace</a>{\medskipamount}</tt> where
- <tt>\medskipamount</tt> is determined by the document style.
-<hr>
-See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 10 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body></html>
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-267.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-267.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 123f724b200..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-267.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,52 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX minipage</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">minipage</font></h1>
-<pre>
- \begin{minipage}[position]{width}
- text
- \end{minipage}
-</pre>
- The minipage environment is similar to a
- <a href="ltx-294.html"><tt>\parbox</tt></a> command. It takes
- the same optional position argument and mandatory width argument. You
- may use other paragraph-making environments such as the
- <a href="lists.html">list-making</a> and
- <a href="ltx-68.html">tabular</a> environments inside a minipage. You can
- also use the minipage environment or
- <a href="ltx-294.html"><tt>\parbox</tt></a> command to put one or
- more paragraphs
- inside of a <a href="ltx-43.html">picture environment</a> or as a
- <a href="ltx-67.html">table item</a>, for example.
-<p>
- There is no paragraph indentation in the minipage environment. That is,
- LaTeX sets <a href="ltx-86.html#lencmd"><tt>\parindent</tt></a> to zero;
- however, you may override this with a
- <a href="ltx-88.html"><tt>\setlength</tt></a> command.
-<p>
- Footnotes in a minipage environment are handled in a way that is
- particularly useful for putting footnotes in figures or tables. A
- <a href="ltx-231.html"><tt>\footnote</tt></a> command puts the
- footnote at the bottom of
- the minipage instead of at the bottom of the page, and it uses the
- <tt>mpfootnote</tt> <a href="ltx-3.html">counter</a> instead of the ordinary
- footnote counter. If you want the footnote in a minipage environment
- to be placed at the bottom of the actual page, in the usual fashion,
- use the <a href="ltx-232.html"><tt>\footnotemark</tt></a> and
- <a href="ltx-234.html"><tt>\footnotetext</tt></a> commands.
-<p>
- <strong>Note</strong>: if you put one minipage inside another
- and if you are using
- footnotes, they may wind up at the bottom of the wrong minipage.
-
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>,
- <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br>
-See also <a href="ltx-294.html"><tt>\parbox</tt></a><br>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 22Nov 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-268.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-268.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 1076a69b3aa..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-268.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,42 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \multicolumn</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\multicolumn</font></h1>
-<p>
- <tt>\multicolumn{cols}{pos}{text}</tt>
-<p>
- Used only in <a href="ltx-202.html">array</a> or
- <a href="ltx-68.html">tabular</a> environments.
-<p>
- The <tt>\multicolumn</tt> is command is
- used to make an entry that spans several columns.
-<p>
- It is useful for making table headings which span several columns, or
- for changing the positioning of the heading for a single column (the
- <tt>pos</tt> argument in <tt>\multicolumn</tt> overriding that of
- the <tt>\tabular</tt> value, for example).
-<p>
- The first mandatory argument, <tt>cols</tt>, specifies the number of columns to
- span. The second mandatory argument, <tt>pos</tt>, specifies the formatting of
- the entry;
-<ul>
-<li>c for centered
-<li>l for flushleft
-<li>r for flushright
-</ul>
- The third mandatory argument, <tt>text</tt>,
- specifies what text is to make up the entry.
-<p>
- <tt>\multicolumn</tt> must either begin a row or be placed immediately
- after an <tt>&amp;</tt>.
-
-<hr>See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>,
- <a href="ltx-202.html">array</a>,
- <A href="ltx-68.html">tabular</A><br>
-Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 2 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-269.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-269.html
deleted file mode 100644
index cb6e02dcb4c..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-269.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,19 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \multiput</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\multiput</font></h1>
-<p>
- <tt>\multiput(x coord,y coord)(delta x,delta y){number of copies}{object}</tt>
-<p>
- The <tt>\multiput</tt> command can be used when you are putting the same object
- in a regular pattern across a picture.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>,
- <A href="ltx-43.html">picture</A><br>
-Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 12 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-27.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-27.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 9746d13ae2a..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-27.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,65 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX Environments</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Environments</font></h1>
-<p>
- LaTeX provides a number of different paragraph-making environments.
- Each environment begins and ends in the same manner.
-<p>
-<pre>
- \begin{environment-name}
- ....
- ....
- \end{environment-name}
-</pre>
-Blank lines before the <tt>\begin{}</tt> or after the <tt>\end{}</tt> cause a
-paragraph break before or after the environment.
-Blank lines after the <tt>\begin{}</tt> or before the <tt>\end{}</tt> are
-ignored.
-<p>
-All <a href="declarations.html">declarations</a> have an environment of the
-same name. However, the reverse does not always work. For example,
-<tt>{\abstract Abstract text ... .}</tt> may not give correct paragraph
-breaks.
-
-<H2>Subtopics</H2>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="ltx-420.html">abstract</a>
-<li><A href="ltx-202.html">array</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-29.html">center</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-31.html">description</A>
-<li><a href="ltx-421.html">displaymath</a>
-<li><A href="ltx-222.html">enumerate</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-223.html">eqnarray</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-224.html">equation</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-225.html">figure</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-228.html">flushleft</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-229.html">flushright</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-250.html">itemize</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-260.html">list</A>
-<li><a href="ltx-115.html#math">math</a>
-<li><A href="ltx-267.html">minipage</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-43.html">picture</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-297.html">quotation</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-298.html">quote</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-67.html">table</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-68.html">tabular</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-73.html">thebibliography</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-77.html">theorem</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-78.html">titlepage</A>
-<li><a href="trivlist.html">trivlist</a>
-<li><A href="ltx-79.html">verbatim</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-81.html">verse</A>
-</ul>
-<hr>
-See also <a href="declarations.html">Declarations</a>,
- <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a><br>
-Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 Nov 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-271.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-271.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 856bad72da7..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-271.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,22 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \newcounter</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\newcounter</font></h1>
-<p>
- <tt>\newcounter{newname}[oldcounter]</tt>
-<p>
- The <tt>\newcounter</tt> command defines a new counter named
-<tt>newname</tt>. The optional
- argument <tt>oldcounter</tt> must be the name of an already defined
- counter; if present the new counter, <tt>newname</tt>, will be
- reset whenever <tt>oldcounter</tt>, the counter named in the optional
- argument, is incremented.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-3.html">Counters</A><br>
-Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-275.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-275.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 4765fb318c0..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-275.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \newline</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\newline</font></h1>
-<p>
- The <tt>\newline</tt> command breaks the line right where it is. The
- <tt>\newline</tt>
- command can be used only in paragraph mode.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</A><br>
-Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-276.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-276.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 5d8a4bd2310..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-276.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,15 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \newpage</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\newpage</font></h1>
-<p>
- The <tt>\newpage</tt> command ends the current page.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</A><br>
-Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-277.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-277.html
deleted file mode 100644
index bb7aa8fbaf0..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-277.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,25 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \newsavebox</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\newsavebox</font></h1>
-<p>
- <tt>\newsavebox{cmd}</tt>
-<p>
-
- Declares <tt>cmd</tt>, which must be a command name that is not already
- defined, to be a bin for saving boxes.
-<p>
- The <tt>\newsavebox</tt> command is a global
- <a href="declarations.html">declaration</a>.
-<p>
- The <tt>\newsavebox</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>.
-<hr>
-See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br>
-See <a href="ltx-307.html"><tt>\sbox</tt> and <tt>\savebox</tt></a><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 15 Aug 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-279.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-279.html
deleted file mode 100644
index b4f1298c1a8..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-279.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,19 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \nocite</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\nocite</font></h1>
- <tt>\nocite{key_list}</tt>
-<p>
- The <tt>\nocite</tt> command produces no text, but writes key_list, which is a
- list of one or more citation keys, on the aux file.
-<p>
- The <tt>\nocite</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>.
-<hr>
-See also: <A href="ltx-73.html">thebibliography</A><br>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 4 Jul 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-280.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-280.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 78ec8877b28..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-280.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \noindent</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\noindent</font></h1>
- When used at the beginning of the paragraph, it suppresses the
- paragraph indentation. It has no effect when used in the middle of a
- paragraph.
-<p>
-<hr>
-See also <a href="ltx-247.html"><tt>\indent</tt></a><br>
-See also: <A href="ltx-111.html">Making Paragraphs</A><br>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jun 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-281.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-281.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 810ea9dffbc..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-281.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,22 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \nolinebreak</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\nolinebreak</font></h1>
-<p>
- <tt>\nolinebreak[number]</tt>
-<p>
- The <tt>\nolinebreak</tt> command prevents LaTeX from breaking the current
- line at the point of the command. With the optional argument,
- <tt>number</tt>, you can convert the
- <tt>\nolinebreak</tt> command from a demand to a
- request. The number must be a number from 0 to 4. The higher the
- number, the more insistent the request is.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</A><br>
-Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-282.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-282.html
deleted file mode 100644
index beb6444b52e..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-282.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \normalsize</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\normalsize</font></h1>
- This is the default type size.
- The size of <tt>\normalsize</tt> is defined by as 10pt unless the 11pt or 12pt
- document style option is used.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>,
- <A href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</A><br>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-283.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-283.html
deleted file mode 100644
index c6be23554e3..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-283.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,21 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \nopagebreak</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\nopagebreak</font></h1>
-<p>
- <tt>\nopagebreak[number]</tt>
-<p>
- The <tt>\nopagebreak</tt> command prevents LaTeX form breaking the current page
- at the point of the command. With the optional argument, <tt>number</tt>, you
- can convert the <tt>\nopagebreak</tt> command from a demand to a request. The
- number must be a number from 0 to 4. The higher the number, the more
- insistent the request is.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</A><br>
-Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-284.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-284.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 43be5c73ceb..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-284.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \onecolumn</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\onecolumn</font></h1>
- The <tt>\onecolumn</tt> declaration starts a new page and produces
- single-column output.
-<p>
-This command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-22.html">Document Styles</A><br>
-See also <a href="ltx-332.html"><tt>\twocolumn</tt></a><br>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 7 Jul 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-286.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-286.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 0abec109128..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-286.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,23 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \oval</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\oval</font></h1>
- <tt>\oval(width,height)[portion]</tt>
-<p>
- The <tt>\oval</tt> command produces a rectangle with rounded corners. The
- optional argument, <tt>portion</tt>, allows you to select part of the oval.
-<ul>
-<li><TT>t</TT> Selects the top portion
-<li><TT>b</TT> Selects the bottom portion
-<li><TT>r</TT> Selects the right portion
-<li><TT>l</TT> Selects the left portion
-</ul>
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-43.html">Picture Environment</A><br>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-287.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-287.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 879f0a4f1be..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-287.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,29 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \overbrace</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\overbrace</font></h1>
-<p>
- <tt>\overbrace{equation}</tt>
-<p>
-
- The <tt>\overbrace</tt> command generates a brace over
- <tt>equation</tt>; math mode.
-<p>
- To "label" the overbrace, use a <a href="ltx-180.html">superscript</a>.
-<hr>
-See also:
-<ul>
-<li><A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</A>
-<li><a href="ltx-288.html"><tt>\overline</tt></a>
-<li><a href="ltx-335.html"><tt>\underbrace</tt></a>
-<li><a href="ltx-336.html"><tt>\underline</tt></a>
-</ul>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 31 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-288.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-288.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 5f973045166..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-288.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,26 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \overline</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\overline</font></h1>
-<p>
- <tt>\overline{equation}</tt>
-<p>
-
- The <tt>\overline</tt> command causes the argument
- <tt>equation</tt> to be overlined; math mode.
-<hr>
-See also:
-<ul>
-<li><A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</A>
-<li><a href="ltx-287.html"><tt>\overbrace</tt></a>
-<li><a href="ltx-335.html"><tt>\underbrace</tt></a>
-<li><a href="ltx-336.html"><tt>\underline</tt></a>
-</ul>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 31 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body></html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-289.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-289.html
deleted file mode 100644
index d425455d209..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-289.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,22 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \pagebreak</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\pagebreak</font></h1>
-<p>
- <tt>\pagebreak[number]</tt>
-<p>
- The <tt>\pagebreak</tt> command tells LaTeX to break the current page at the
- point of the command. With the optional argument, <tt>number</tt>, you can
- convert the <tt>\pagebreak</tt> command from a demand to a request. The number
- must be a number from 0 to 4. The higher the number, the more
- insistent the request is.
-<p>
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</A><br>
-Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-29.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-29.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 96782cb74ec..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-29.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,28 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX center</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">center</font></h1>
-<p><pre>
- \begin{center}
- Text on line 1 \\
- Text on line 2 \\
- ...
- ...
- \end{center}
-</pre>
-
- The center environment allows you to create a paragraph consisting of
- lines that are centered within the left and right margins on the
- current page. Each line must be terminated with the string <tt>\\.</tt>
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-30.html"><tt>\centering</tt></A><br>
-See also <a href="ltx-228.html">Flushleft</a>,
- <a href="ltx-229.html">Flushright</a> Environments<br>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jun 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-291.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-291.html
deleted file mode 100644
index b307fdd1216..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-291.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,22 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \pageref</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\pageref</font></h1>
-<p>
- <tt>\pageref{key}</tt>
-<p>
-
- The <tt>\pageref</tt> command produces the page number of the place in the text
- where the corresponding
- <a href="ltx-252.html"><tt>\label</tt></a> command appears.
-<p>
-The <tt>\pageref</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>.
-<hr>
-See also: <A href="ltx-13.html">Cross References</A><br>
-Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 4 Jul 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-293.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-293.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 8c3c0916b17..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-293.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \par</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\par</font></h1>
-
- Equivalent to a blank line; often used to make command or environment
- definitions easier to read.
-<hr>
-See also: <A href="ltx-111.html">Making Paragraphs</A><br>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jun 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-294.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-294.html
deleted file mode 100644
index c9801ff9e45..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-294.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,35 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \parbox</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\parbox</font></h1>
-<p>
- <tt>\parbox[position]{width}{text}</tt>
-<p>
-
- A parbox is a box whose contents are created in paragraph mode. The
- <tt>\parbox</tt> has two mandatory arguments:
-<ul>
-<li> <tt>width</tt>: specifies the width of the parbox, and
-<li> <tt>text</tt>: the text that goes inside the parbox.
-</ul>
- LaTeX will position a parbox so its center lines up with the center of
- the text line. An optional first argument allows you to
- line up either the top or bottom line in the parbox, by using as optional
- <tt>position</tt> argument <tt>t</tt> or <tt>b</tt>, respectively .
-<p>
- A <tt>\parbox</tt> command is used for a parbox containing a small piece of
- text, with nothing fancy inside. In particular, you shouldn't use any
- of the paragraph-making environments inside a <tt>\parbox</tt> argument. For
- larger pieces of text, including ones containing a paragraph-making
- environment, you should use a <a href="ltx-267.html">minipage</a> environment.
-<p>
-The <tt>\parbox</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>.
-<hr>
-See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 8 Aug 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-296.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-296.html
deleted file mode 100644
index acc52f00fde..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-296.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,30 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \put</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\put</font></h1>
-<p>
- <tt>\put(x-coord,y-coord){object}</tt>
-<p>
-
- The <tt>\put</tt> command places the <tt>object</tt>
- specified by the mandatory argument at the given coordinates.
-<p>
-The coordinates are in units of
-<a href="unitlength.html"><tt>\unitlength</tt></a>
-<p>
-Some of the <tt>object</tt> items you might place are
-<ul>
-<li><a href="ltx-257.html"><tt>\line</tt></a>
-<li><a href="ltx-341.html"><tt>\vector</tt></a>
-<li><a href="ltx-210.html"><tt>\circle</tt></a>
-<li><a href="ltx-286.html"><tt>\oval</tt></a>
-</ul>
-See also: <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>,
- <A href="ltx-43.html">picture</A><br>
-Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 12 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-297.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-297.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 1712de6aff7..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-297.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,26 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX quotation</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">quotation</font></h1>
-<pre>
- \begin{quotation}
- text
- \end{quotation}
-</pre>
- The margins of the quotation environment are indented on the left and
- the right. The text is justified at both margins and there is
- paragraph indentation. Leaving a blank line between text produces a
- new paragraph.
-<p>
- For a short quote (one paragraph), use the
- <a href="ltx-298.html">quote environment</a>.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-298.html">Quote Environment</A><br>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 27 Sep 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-298.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-298.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 415c6a86eb2..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-298.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,25 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX quote</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">quote</font></h1>
-<pre>
- \begin{quote}
- text
- \end{quote}
-</pre>
-
- The margins of the quote environment are indented on the left and the
- right. The text is justified at both margins. For longer quotations
- (more than one paragraph) use the <a href="ltx-297.html">quotation
- environment</a>.
-
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-297.html">Quotation Environment</A><br>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 27 Sep 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-299.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-299.html
deleted file mode 100644
index dad37b276f5..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-299.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \raggedbottom</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\raggedbottom</font></h1>
- The <tt>\raggedbottom</tt> declaration makes all pages the height of the text
- on that page. No extra vertical space is added.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-22.html">Document Styles</A><br>
-See also <a href="ltx-227.html"><tt>\flushbottom</tt></a><br>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 28 Jun 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-3.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-3.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 2b424b2dd68..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-3.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,88 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX Counters</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Counters</font></h1>
-<p>
- Everything LaTeX numbers for you has a counter associated with it. The
- name of the counter is the same as the name of the environment or
- command that produces the number, except with no <tt>\.</tt> Below is a list
- of some of the counters used in LaTeX's standard document styles to control
- numbering.
-<pre>
- part paragraph figure enumi
- chapter subparagraph table enumii
- section page footnote enumiii
- subsection equation mpfootnote enumiv
- subsubsection
-</pre>
-
-<h2>Manipulating the way counters are printed</h2>
-Counters are printed in LaTeX by using a command generated as
-"<tt>\the</tt>" suffixed with the name of the counter. Thus, equation
-numbers are printed by the <tt>\theequation</tt> command, and
-section numbers by the <tt>\thesection</tt> command.
-If you want to change the way such numbers are printed, for example,
-change from arabic to Roman numerals, you need to redefine the
-appropriate command, using the
-<tt><a href="ltx-18.html">\renewcommand</a></tt> command.
-<p>
-As an example, to number equations in an appendix as <tt>A-1</tt>,
-<tt>A-2</tt>, ... , use <pre>
- <tt>\renewcommand{\theequation}{A-<a href="ltx-201.html">\arabic</a>{equation}}</tt></pre>
-The second argument implies that the text produced by the renewed
-<tt>\theequation</tt> command will be "A-" followed by the output from
-the <tt>\arabic{equation}</tt> command, which is the value of the
-equation counter, printed as an arabic number.
-<p>
-In <a href="lists.html">List Environments</a> the format for the
-item labels is given by commands like <tt>\labelitemi</tt> and
-<tt>\labelitemii</tt> (for the first two levels of the
-<a href="ltx-250.html">Itemize Environment</a>), and like <tt>\labelenumi</tt>
-(for the <a href="ltx-222.html">Enumerate Environment</a>), and these may
-also be redefined.
-<p>
-There is an <a href="ltx-260.html#example">example</a> of manipulating such
-counters in the discussion of the List Environment.
-See also the discussions in the <a href="ltx-250.html">Itemize Environment</a>
-and in the <a href="ltx-222.html#example">Enumerate Environment</a>.
-<p>
-You can force a change in the number produced by any of the counters. For
-example, if you wanted to produce a single page numbered 13, you could use
-<pre>
- <tt><a href="ltx-310.html">\setcounter</a>{page}{13}</tt></pre>
-A variety of commands for manipulating counters this way are given below.
-
-<H2>Related topics</H2>
-<ul>
-<li>Commands that manupulate counters
-<ul>
-<li><A href="ltx-195.html">\addtocounter</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-271.html">\newcounter</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-310.html">\setcounter</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-338.html">\usecounter</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-339.html">\value</A>
-<li><a href="ltx-18.html">\renewcommand</a>
-</ul>
-<li>Commands that print the value of a counter in various formats
-<ul>
-<li><A href="ltx-201.html">\arabic</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-199.html">\alph \Alph</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-305.html">\roman \Roman</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-230.html">\fnsymbol</A>
-</ul>
-<li>For some examples of usage in list environments, see
-<ul>
-<li><a href="ltx-260.html#example">List Enviroment</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-250.html">Itemize Environment</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-222.html">Enumerate Environment</a>
-</ul>
-</ul>
-<hr>
-See also <a href="ltx-141.html">Sectioning</a><br>
-Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 25 Oct 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-30.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-30.html
deleted file mode 100644
index f223a7270ba..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-30.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,42 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \centering</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\centering</font></h1>
-
-<p>This <a href="declarations.html">declaration</a>
-corresponds to the center environment. This
-declaration can be used inside an environment such as quote or in a
-parbox. The text of a figure or table can be centered on the page by
-putting a <tt>\centering</tt> command at the beginning of the figure or table
-environment.</p>
-
-<p>Unlike the <a href="ltx-29.html">center environment</a>,
-the <tt>\centering</tt> command does not start
-a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX formats paragraph units.
-To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the declaration
-must contain the blank line or <tt>\end</tt> command (of an environment like
-quote) that ends the paragraph unit.</p>
-
-<p><it>Editor's note: although not listed as <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>
-in Lamport, I have found it necessary to use a <tt>\protect</tt> when putting
-a <tt>\centering</tt> command in a
-<a href="ltx-3.html">sectioning command</a>.<br>
-For example,</p>
-
-<pre>
- <tt>\section{\protect \centering Centered section heading}</tt>
-</pre>
-
-<hr>
-
-<p>See also <a href="ltx-29.html">Center environment</a><br>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a></p>
-
-<hr>
-
-<address>
-Revised: RBS, 21 February 1997
-</address>
-
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-300.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-300.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 5fb17cbbba9..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-300.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,25 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \raggedleft</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\raggedleft</font></h1>
- This <a href="declarations.html">declaration</a>
- corresponds to the <a href="ltx-229.html">flushright
- environment</a>. This
- declaration can be used inside an environment such as quote or in a
- parbox.
-<p>
- Unlike the flushright environment, the <tt>\raggedleft</tt> command does not
- start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX formats paragraph
- units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the
- declaration must contain the blank line or <tt>\end</tt> command (of an
- environment like quote) that ends the paragraph unit.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>,
-<A href="ltx-229.html">flushright</A><br>
-See also <a href="ltx-301.html"><tt>\raggedright</tt></a><br>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jun 1995.
-</address>
-</body></html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-301.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-301.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 3d85e2cad6c..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-301.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,25 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \raggedright</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\raggedright</font></h1>
- This <a href="declarations.html">declaration</a>
- corresponds to the <a href="ltx-228.html">flushleft environment</a>.
- This declaration can be used inside an environment such as quote or in a
- parbox.
-<p>
- Unlike the flushleft environment, the <tt>\raggedright</tt> command does not
- start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX formats paragraph
- units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the
- declaration must contain the blank line or <tt>\end</tt> command (of an
- environment like quote) that ends the paragraph unit.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>,
- <a href="ltx-29.html">Center</a>, <a href="ltx-228.html">Flushleft</a><br>
-See also <a href="ltx-300.html"><tt>\raggeleft</tt></a><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jun 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-302.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-302.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 5b7e97253d4..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-302.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,33 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \raisebox</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\raisebox</font></h1>
-<p>
- <tt>\raisebox{distance}[extend-above][extend-below]{text}</tt>
-<p>
-
- The <tt>\raisebox</tt> command creates a LR box containing <tt>text</tt>;
- it is used to raise or lower text. The first
- mandatory argument specifies how high the text is to be raised (or
- lowered if it is a negative amount).
-<p>
- Sometimes it's useful to make LaTeX think something has a different
- size than it really does - or a different size than LaTeX would
- normally think it has. The <tt>\raisebox</tt> command lets you tell LaTeX how
- tall it is.
-<p>
- The first optional argument, <tt>extend-above</tt>, makes LaTeX think that the
- text extends above the current line by the amount specified. The second
- optional argument, <tt>extend-below</tt>, makes LaTeX think that the text
- extends below the current line by the amount specified.
-<p>
- <tt>\raisebox</tt> is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>.
-<hr>
-See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 8 Aug 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-303.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-303.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 26d4e22d60b..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-303.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \ref</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\ref</font></h1>
-<p>
- <tt>\ref{key}</tt>
-<p>
-
- The <tt>\ref</tt> command produces the number of the sectional unit, equation
- number, ... of the corresponding
-<a href="ltx-252.html"><tt>\label</tt></a> command.
-<p>
-Bibliographic references using the
-<a href="ltx-73.html"><tt>\thebibliography</tt></a>
-mechanism obtain their number or label using
-<a href="ltx-211.html"><tt>\cite</tt></a>
-<p>
-The <tt>\ref</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-13.html">Cross References</A><br>
-Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 4 Jul 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-304.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-304.html
deleted file mode 100644
index a4c495c3194..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-304.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,21 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \rm</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\rm</font></h1>
-<p>
- Roman typeface (default).
-<p>
-This is version 2.09; see also
- <a href="fonts2e.html">LaTeX2e font selection</a><br>
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>,
- <A href="ltx-177.html">Styles</A><br>
-See also <a href="boldmath.html"><tt>\boldmath</tt></a><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-305.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-305.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 82de9076180..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-305.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,21 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \roman</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\roman</font></h1>
-
- <tt>\roman{counter}</tt>
-<p>
- This command causes the current value of <tt>counter</tt> to be printed
- in roman numerals.
- The <tt>\roman</tt> command causes lower case roman numerals, i.e.,
- i, ii, iii, ..., while the <tt>\Roman</tt> command causes upper case roman
- numerals, i.e., I, II, III...
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-3.html">Counters</A><br>
-Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 18 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-306.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-306.html
deleted file mode 100644
index c9af088929a..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-306.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,37 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \rule</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\rule</font></h1>
-<p>
- <tt>\rule[raise-height]{width}{height}</tt>
-<p>
-
- The <tt>\rule</tt> command generates a rectangular "blob of ink."
- It can be used to produce horizontal or vertical lines. The arguments
- are defined as follows.
- <ul>
- <li><TT>raise-height</TT> specifies how high to raise the rule (optional)
- <li><TT>width</TT> specifies the length of the rule (mandatory)
- <li><TT>height</TT> specifies the height of the rule (mandatory)
- </ul>
- The default value for <tt>raise-height</tt> is zero; a negative value
- lowers the rule.
-<p>
- The reference point of the rule box is the lower left-hand corner.
-<p>
- A rule box of zero width may be used as a "strut" which is invisible but
- which causes LaTeX to adjust veritcal spacing to leave room. This can
- be particularly useful where the
- <a href="ltx-347.html"><tt>\vspace</tt></a> command cannot be used,
- for example, within <a href="ltx-115.html">mathematical formulas</a>.
-<p>
- The <tt>\rule</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>.
-<hr>
-See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 21 Aug 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-307.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-307.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 0b3f34506b1..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-307.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,35 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \savebox</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\savebox</font></h1>
-<p>
- <tt>\sbox{cmd}{text}</tt><br>
- <tt>\savebox{cmd}[width][pos]{text}</tt>
-<p>
- These commands typeset <tt>text</tt> in a box just as for
- <a href="ltx-265.html"><tt>\mbox</tt></a> or
- <a href="ltx-262.html"><tt>\makebox</tt></a>.
- However, instead of printing the resulting box, they save it in
- the LaTeX command
- <tt>cmd</tt>, which must have been declared with
- <a href="ltx-277.html"><tt>\newsavebox</tt></a>.
- The saved <tt>text</tt> is accessed by a
- <a href="ltx-337.html"><tt>\usebox</tt></a> command.
-<p>
- The <tt>\sbox</tt> and <tt>\savebox</tt> commands are
- <a href="declarations.html">declarations</a> with the usual
- rules for scope.
-<p>
- The <tt>\sbox</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">robust</a>;
- the <tt>\savebox</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>.
-<hr>
-See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br>
-See <a href="ltx-277.html"><tt>\newsavebox</tt></a>,
- <a href="ltx-337.html"><tt>\usebox</tt></a><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 15 Aug 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-308.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-308.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 805a66a89c3..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-308.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,20 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \sc</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\sc</font></h1>
-<p>
- Small caps typeface.
-<p>
-This is version 2.09; see also
- <a href="fonts2e.html">LaTeX2e font selection</a><br>
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>,
- <A href="ltx-177.html">Styles</A><br>
-See also <a href="boldmath.html"><tt>\boldmath</tt></a><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-309.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-309.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 1096770416b..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-309.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,14 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \scriptsize</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\scriptsize</font></h1>
- Second smallest of 10 typefaces available.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>,
- <A href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</A><br>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995.
-</address>
-</body></html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-31.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-31.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 462e493dc11..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-31.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,32 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX description</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">description</font></h1>
-<p>
-<p><pre>
- <tt>\begin{description}
- <a href="item.html">\item[label]</a> First item
- \item[label] Second item
- ....
- \end{description}</tt>
-</pre>
- The description environment is used to make labeled lists. The <tt>label</tt>
- is bold face and flushed right. The text of the <tt>\item</tt> command
- is indented.
-<p>
- Typical usage is for descriptive lists
- or lists of definitions; the <tt>label</tt> is then the name of the
- item being described or defined.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>,
- <a href="lists.html">Lists</a>,
- <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a><br>
-See also <a href="ltx-222.html">Enumerate</a><br>
-See also <a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 18 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-310.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-310.html
deleted file mode 100644
index bb877e8b1d6..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-310.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,20 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \setcounter</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\setcounter</font></h1>
-<p>
- <tt>\setcounter{counter}{value}</tt>
-<p>
-
- The <tt>\setcounter</tt> command sets the value of the specified
- <tt>counter</tt> to that
- specified by the <tt>value</tt> argument.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-3.html">Counters</A><br>
-Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 2 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-311.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-311.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 18259f9cd11..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-311.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,29 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \settoheight</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\settoheight</font></h1>
-<p>
- <tt>\settoheight{len-cmd}{text}</tt>
-<p>
-
- The <tt>\settoheight</tt> command sets the value of a
- <a href="ltx-86.html#lencmd">length command</a>, <tt>len-cmd</tt>,
- which is specified as the first argument, equal to
- the maximum height of the <tt>text</tt> argument in the current font.
-<p>
- For example,
-<pre>
- <tt>\settoheight{\baselineskip}{Xanadu}
- <a href="ltx-88.html">\setlength</a>{\baselineskip}{1.5\baselineskip}</tt>
-</pre>
-would set the value of <a href="ltx-86.html#lencmd"><tt>\baselineskip</tt></a>
-to 1.5 times the height of the capital "X".
-<hr>
-See <a href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</a><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 9 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-312.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-312.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 2935570cb4f..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-312.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,23 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \settodepth</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\settodepth</font></h1>
-<p>
- <tt>\settodepth{len-cmd}{text}</tt>
-<p>
-
- The <tt>\settodepth</tt> command sets the value of a
- <a href="ltx-86.html#lencmd">length command</a>, <tt>len-cmd</tt>,
- which is specified as the first argument, equal to
- the depth (distance below the baseline)
- of the <tt>text</tt> argument in the current font.
-<p>
-<hr>
-See <a href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</a><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 9 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-313.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-313.html
deleted file mode 100644
index e6b486554a3..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-313.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \sf</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\sf</font></h1>
-<p>
- Sans serif typeface.
-<p>
-This is version 2.09; see also
- <a href="fonts2e.html">LaTeX2e font selection</a><br>
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>,
- <A href="ltx-177.html">Styles</A><br>
-See also <a href="boldmath.html"><tt>\boldmath</tt></a><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 May 1995.
-</address></body></html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-314.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-314.html
deleted file mode 100644
index bacb8e69752..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-314.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,25 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \shortstack</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\shortstack</font></h1>
-<p>
- <tt>\shortstack[position]{ ... \\ ... \\ ... }</tt>
-<p>
- The <tt>\shortstack</tt> command produces a stack of objects. The valid
- positions are:
-<ul>
-<li><TT>r</TT> Moves the objects to the right of the stack
-<li><TT>l</TT> Moves the objects to the left of the stack
-<li><TT>c</TT> Moves the objects to the center of the stack (default)
-</ul>
-<hr>
-See also: <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>,
-<A href="ltx-43.html">picture</A><br>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 27 Sep 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-315.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-315.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 00db42b0cfc..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-315.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,21 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \signature</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\signature</font></h1>
-<tt>\signature{Your Name}</tt>
-<p>
- Your name, as it should appear at the end of the letter underneath the
- space for your signature. Items that should go on separate lines
- should be separated by
- <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a> commands.
-<hr>
-See <a href="ltx-91.html">Letters</a><br>
-See <a href="ltx-98.html"><tt>\closing</tt></a><br>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 24 Jun 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-316.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-316.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 802fbac2f48..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-316.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \sl</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\sl</font></h1>
-<p>
- Slanted typeface.
-<p>
-This is version 2.09; see also
- <a href="fonts2e.html">LaTeX2e font selection</a><br>
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>,
- <A href="ltx-177.html">Styles</A><br>
-See also <a href="boldmath.html"><tt>\boldmath</tt></a><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 May 1995.
-</address></body></html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-317.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-317.html
deleted file mode 100644
index c0fc3c21b49..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-317.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,15 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \small</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\small</font></h1>
- Slightly smaller than default typeface size.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>,
- <A href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</A><br>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-318.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-318.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 7bd0ca09280..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-318.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,21 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \smallskip</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\smallskip</font></h1>
-<p>
- <tt>\smallskip</tt>
-<p>
-
- The <tt>\smallskip</tt> command is equivalent to
- <tt><a href="ltx-347.html">\vspace</a>{\smallskipamount}</tt> where
- <tt>\smallskipamount</tt> is determined by the document style.
-<hr>
-See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a>,
- <a href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</a><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 10 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-319.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-319.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 65392112407..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-319.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,23 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \sqrt</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\sqrt</font></h1>
- <tt>\sqrt[root]{arg}</tt>
-<p>
- The <tt>\sqrt</tt> command produces the square root (radical) symbol with the
- argument as radicand. The
- optional argument, root, determines what root to produce, i.e. the
- cube root of x+y would be typed as <tt>$\sqrt[3]{x+y}$</tt>.
-<p>
-The radical sign is <a href="ltx-408.html">variable size</a>, that is,
-it is made larger if the radicand is, for example, a built-up fraction.
-<hr>
-See also: <A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>,
-<A href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</A>.<br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 31 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-323.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-323.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 4340d27eaa3..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-323.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,19 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \telephone</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\telephone</font></h1>
- <tt>\telephone{number}</tt>
-<p>
- This is your telephone number. This only appears if the firstpage
- pagestyle is selected.
-<hr>
-See <a href="ltx-91.html">Letters</a><br>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 24 Jun 1995.
-</address>
-
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-324.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-324.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 204ec9e4fb0..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-324.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,30 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \thanks</title>
-</head><body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\thanks</font></h1>
-<p>
- <tt>\thanks{text}</tt>
-<p>
-
- The <tt>\thanks</tt> command produces a footnote to the title.
-<p>
-It is typically used as part of the argument of a
-<a href="ltx-329.html"><tt>\title</tt></a> or
-<a href="ltx-203.html"><tt>\author</tt></a> command.
-<p>
-For example
-<pre>
- <tt>\title{Work in Progress
- \thanks{Contribution No. 1 from our lab}}
- \author{A. Author\thanks{Supported by a grant}}</tt>
-</pre>
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-131.html">Page Styles</A>,
-<A href="ltx-263.html"><tt>\maketitle</tt></A>.<br>
-Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 15 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-328.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-328.html
deleted file mode 100644
index f247468637f..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-328.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,16 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \tiny</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\tiny</font></h1>
- Smallest of 10 typefaces available. All fonts may not be available in
- this size.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>,
- <A href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</A><br>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-329.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-329.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 74902fc9774..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-329.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,24 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \title</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\title</font></h1>
-<p>
- <tt>\title{text}</tt>
-<p>
- The <tt>\title</tt> command declares <tt>text</tt> to be the title. Use
- <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a> to tell
- LaTeX where to start a new line in a long title.
-<p>
- A footnote to a title is produced with the
- <a href="ltx-324.html"><tt>\thanks</tt></a> command.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-131.html">Page Styles</A>,
- <a href="ltx-78.html">Titlepage Environment</a><br>
-See also <A href="ltx-263.html"><tt>\maketitle</tt></A><br>
-Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 Nov 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-330.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-330.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 49513cecc87..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-330.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,16 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head>
-<title>Help On LaTeX \today</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\today</font></h1>
-The command <tt>\today</tt> generates the current date in the
-format Month dd, year.
-<hr>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 10 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-331.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-331.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 917ba0a38ea..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-331.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,20 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \tt</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\tt</font></h1>
-<p>
- Typewriter typeface.
-<p>
-This is version 2.09; see also
- <a href="fonts2e.html">LaTeX2e font selection</a><br>
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>,
- <A href="ltx-177.html">Styles</A><br>
-See also <a href="boldmath.html"><tt>\boldmath</tt></a><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-332.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-332.html
deleted file mode 100644
index c98b9e94dac..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-332.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \twocolumn</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\twocolumn</font></h1>
- The <tt>\twocolumn</tt> declaration starts a new page and produces two-column
- output.
-<p>
- This command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-22.html">Document Styles</A><br>
-See also <a href="ltx-284.html"><tt>\onecolumn</tt></a><br>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 7 Jul 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-335.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-335.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 38dabf514d9..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-335.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,28 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \underbrace</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\underbrace</font></h1>
-<p>
- <tt>\underbrace{formula}</tt>
-<p>
-
- The <tt>\underbrace</tt> command generates a brace underneath
- the <tt>formula</tt>; math mode.
-<p>
-To "label" the underbrace, use a <a href="ltx-179.html">subscript</a>.
-<hr>
-See also:
-<ul>
-<li><A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</A>
-<li><a href="ltx-287.html"><tt>\overbrace</tt></a>
-<li><a href="ltx-288.html"><tt>\overline</tt></a>
-<li><a href="ltx-336.html"><tt>\underline</tt></a>
-</ul>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 31 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-336.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-336.html
deleted file mode 100644
index ceefcd24112..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-336.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,28 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \underline</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\underline</font></h1>
- <tt>\underline{text}</tt>
-<p>
- The <tt>\underline</tt> command causes the argument text to be underlined. This
- command can be used in math mode, paragraph mode, and LR mode.
-<p>
-This command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a> although the
-<a href="ltx-288.html"><tt>\overline</tt></a> command is robust.
-<hr>
-See also:
-<ul>
-<li><A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</A>
-<li><a href="ltx-287.html"><tt>\overbrace</tt></a>
-<li><a href="ltx-288.html"><tt>\overline</tt></a>
-<li><a href="ltx-335.html"><tt>\underbrace</tt></a>
-</ul>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 7 July 1995.
-</address>
-
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-337.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-337.html
deleted file mode 100644
index f4e30f67bc1..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-337.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,23 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \usebox</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\usebox</font></h1>
-<p>
- <tt>\usebox{cmd}</tt>
-<p>
-
- Prints the box most recently saved in <tt>cmd by</tt> a
-<a href="ltx-307.html"><tt>\savebox</tt> or <tt>\sbox</tt></a> command.
-<p>
- The <tt>\usebox</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">robust</a>.
-<hr>
-See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br>
-See <a href="ltx-277.html"><tt>\newsavebox</tt></a>,
- <a href="ltx-307.html"><tt>\savebox</tt></a><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 8 Aug 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-338.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-338.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 64db37f4f6b..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-338.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,22 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \usecounter</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\usecounter</font></h1>
-<p>
- <tt>\usecounter{counter}</tt>
-<p>
-
- The <tt>\usecounter</tt> command is used in the second argument of the
- <a href="ltx-260.html">list environment</a>
- to allow the counter specified to be used to number the
- list items.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-3.html">Counters</A>,
- <a href="ltx-260.html">list environment</a><br>
-Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 18 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-339.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-339.html
deleted file mode 100644
index a1c52a55300..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-339.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \value</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\value</font></h1>
-<p>
- <tt>\value{counter}</tt>
-<p>
-
- The <tt>\value</tt> command produces the value of the counter named in the
- mandatory argument. It can be used where LaTeX expects an integer or
- number, such as the second argument of a
- <a href="ltx-310.html"><tt>\setcounter</tt></a> or
- <a href="ltx-195.html"><tt>\addtocounter</tt></a> command, or in
-<pre>
- <tt>\hspace{\value{foo}<a href="ltx-86.html#lencmd">\parindent}</a></tt>
-</pre>
- It is useful for doing arithmetic with counters.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-3.html">Counters</A>,
- <a href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</a><br>
-Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 9 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-340.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-340.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 0f32746eb98..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-340.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,25 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \vdots</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\vdots</font></h1>
- The <tt>\vdots</tt> command produces a vertical ellipsis.<br>
- Can be used only in math mode.
-<hr>
-See also:
-<ul>
-<li><A href="ltx-207.html">\cdots</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-218.html">\ddots</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-256.html">\ldots</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-340.html">\vdots</A>
-<p>
-<li><A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>,
-<li><A href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</A>.
-</ul>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 25 April 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-341.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-341.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 93240e1509c..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-341.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,31 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \vector</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\vector</font></h1>
-<p>
- <tt>\vector(x-slope,y-slope){length}</tt>
-<p>
- The <tt>\vector</tt> command draws an arrow of the specified length and slope
- with the arrow head at the opposite end of the line from the
- reference point (see <a href="ltx-296.html"><tt>\put</tt></a>).
-<p>
-The slope is determined by <tt>(x-slope,y-slope)</tt> which are signed
-integers of magnitude less than or equal to 4 and which have no common
-divisor except for plus or minus one; For example (1,0) is a horizontal
-arrow pointing right; (1,1) gives a slope of
-45 degress; (0,1) is a vertical arrow pointing up; (-1,1) is at 135 degrees.
-<p>
-The <strong>horizontal</strong> extent of the arrow is given by the
-<tt>length</tt> parameter, except in the case of a vertical arrow in
-which case <tt>length</tt> specifies the vertical height.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>,
- <A href="ltx-43.html">picture</A><br>
-See also <a href="ltx-257.html"><tt>\line</tt></a><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 12 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-342.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-342.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 65cad2f1b0c..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-342.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,39 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \verb</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\verb</font></h1>
-<p>
- <tt>\verb char literal_text char</tt><br>
-or<br>
- <tt>\verb*char literal_text char</tt><p>
-
- Typesets <tt>literal_text</tt> exactly as typed,
- including special characters
- and spaces, using a typewriter (<tt>\tt</tt>) font. There may be no
- space between <tt>\verb</tt> or <tt>\verb*</tt>
- and <tt>char</tt> (space is shown here only for
- clarity). The *-form differs only in that spaces are printed
- as "visual" spaces, i.e., a short, squat "u".
-<p>
- Any <tt>char</tt> except a space (or a <tt>*</tt> for the <tt>\verb</tt>
- form) may be chosen as the delimiter. Thus, the input
-<pre>
- \verb1This!is?the##1 verbatim ...
-</pre>
-would produce<p>
-
-<tt>This!is?the##</tt> verbatim ...
-<p>
-The <tt>\verb</tt> command may <strong>not</strong> be used in the argument
-of another command. For example, it cannot be used in the text of a
-<a href="ltx-141.html">sectioning command</a>.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>,
- <A href="ltx-79.html">verbatim</A><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 20 Oct 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-345.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-345.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 7b0b0ec05e0..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-345.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,20 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \vfill</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\vfill</font></h1>
-<p>
- The <tt>\vfill</tt> fill command produces a
- <a href="ltx-86.html#rubber">rubber length</a> which can stretch or
- shrink vertically. It is equivalent to a blank line followed by
- <tt><a href="ltx-347.html">\vspace</a>\fill</tt>. It should be used only
- in <a href="ltx-130.html">paragraph mode</a>.
-<hr>
-See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a>,
- <a href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</a><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 23 Oct 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-346.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-346.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 6e3bc2ba17e..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-346.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \vline</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\vline</font></h1>
- The <tt>\vline</tt> command will draw a vertical line extending the full height
- and depth of its row. An <tt><a href="ltx-238.html">\hfill</a></tt> command
- can be used to move the line
- to the edge of the column. It can also be used in an @-expression.
-<hr>
-See also: <a href="ltx-202.html">array</a>,
-<A href="ltx-68.html">tabular</A><br>
-Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 31 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body></html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-347.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-347.html
deleted file mode 100644
index d643dc901ba..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-347.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,29 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \vspace</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\vspace</font></h1>
-<p>
- <tt>\vspace[*]{length}</tt>
-<p>
-
- The <tt>\vspace</tt> command adds vertical space. The length of the space can
- be expressed in any terms that LaTeX understands, i.e., points,
- inches, etc. You can add negative as well as positive space with an
- <tt>\vspace</tt> command.
-<p>
- If <tt>\vspace</tt> appears in the middle of a paragraph the space
- is added after the line containing it.
-<p>
- LaTeX removes vertical space that comes at the end of a page. If you
- don't want LaTeX to remove this space, include the optional *
- argument. Then the space is never removed.
-<hr>
-See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a>,
- <a href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</a><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 14 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-37.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-37.html
deleted file mode 100644
index fe16097d0f2..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-37.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,24 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \raggedright</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\raggedright</font></h1>
- This <a href="declarations.html">declaration</a>
- corresponds to the <a href="ltx-228.html">flushleft environment</a>. This
- declaration can be used inside an environment such as quote or in a
- parbox.
-<p>
- Unlike the flushleft environment, the <tt>\raggedright</tt> command does not
- start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX formats paragraph
- units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the
- declaration must contain the blank line or <tt>\end</tt> command (of an
- environment like quote) that ends the paragraph unit.
-<hr>
-See also <a href="ltx-228.html">flushleft environment</a><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 27 Sep 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-39.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-39.html
deleted file mode 100644
index a9a1a1ca3c1..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-39.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,25 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \raggedleft</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\raggedleft</font></h1>
-<p>
- This <a href="declarations.html">declaration</a>
- corresponds to the <a href="ltx-229.html">flushright environment</a>. This
- declaration can be used inside an environment such as quote or in a
- parbox.
-<p>
- Unlike the flushright environment, the <tt>\raggedleft</tt> command does not
- start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX formats paragraph
- units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the
- declaration must contain the blank line or <tt>\end</tt> command (of an
- environment like quote) that ends the paragraph unit.
-<hr>
-See also <a href="ltx-229.html">flushright environment</a><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 27 Sep 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-401.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-401.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 3acd2e45614..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-401.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,96 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head>
-<title>Accents</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Accents</font></h1>
-The rules differ somewhat depending whether you are in
-<a href="ltx-130.html">text mode</a>, <a href="ltx-115.html#math">math
-mode</a>, or the <a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing environment</a>
-
-<h2>Text mode</h2>
-The following accents may be placed on letters. Although "o" is used in
-most of the example, the accents may be placed on any letter.
-Accents may even be placed above a "missing" letter; for example,
-<tt>\~{}</tt> produces a tilde over a blank space.
-<p>
-The following commands may be used only in paragraph or LR mode.<br>
-<ul>
-<li><tt>\`{o}</tt> produces a grave accent, &ograve;
-<li><tt>\'{o}</tt> produces an acute accent, &oacute;
-<li><tt>\^{o}</tt> produces a circumflex, &ocirc;
-<li><tt>\"{o}</tt> produces an umlaut or dieresis, &ouml;
-<li><tt>\H{o}</tt> produces a long Hungarian umlaut
-<li><tt>\~{o}</tt> produces a tilde, &otilde;
-<li><tt>\c{c}</tt> produces a cedilla, &ccedil;
-<li><tt>\={o}</tt> produces a macron accent (a bar over the letter)
-<li><tt>\b{o}</tt> produces a bar under the letter
-<li><tt>\.{o}</tt> produces a dot over the letter
-<li><tt>\d{o}</tt> produces a dot under the letter
-<li><tt>\u{o}</tt> produces a breve over the letter
-<li><tt>\v{o}</tt> produces a "v" over the letter
-<li><tt>\t{oo}</tt> produces a "tie" (inverted u) over the two letters
-</ul>
-<p>
-Note that the letters "i" and "j" require special treatment when
-they are given accents because it is often desirable to replace the
-dot with the accent. For this purpose, the commands <tt>\i</tt> and
-<tt>\j</tt> can be used to produce dotless letters.<p>
-For example,
-<ul>
-<li><tt>\^{\i}</tt> should be used for i, circumflex, &icirc;
-<li><tt>\"{\i}</tt> should be used for i, umlaut, &iuml;
-</ul>
-
-<h2><a name="math">Math mode</a></h2>
-Several of the above and some similar accents can also be
-produced in math mode. The following commands may be used <strong>only</strong>
-in math mode.
-<ul>
-<li><tt>\hat{o}</tt> is similar to the circumflex (cf. <tt>\^</tt>)
-<li><tt>\widehat{oo}</tt> is a wide version of <tt>\hat</tt> over several letters
-<li><tt>\check{o}</tt> is a vee or check (cf. <tt>\v</tt>)
-<li><tt>\tilde{o}</tt> is a tilde (cf. <tt>\~</tt>)
-<li><tt>\widetilde{oo}</tt> is a wide version
- of <tt>\tilde</tt> over several letters
-<li><tt>\acute{o}</tt> is an acute accent (cf. <tt>\`</tt>)
-<li><tt>\grave{o}</tt> is a grave accent (cf. <tt>\'</tt>)
-<li><tt>\dot{o}</tt> is a dot over the letter (cf. <tt>\.</tt>)
-<li><tt>\ddot{o}</tt> is a double dot over the letter
-<li><tt>\breve{o}</tt> is a breve (cf. <tt>\u</tt>)
-<li><tt>\bar{o}</tt> is a macron (cf. <tt>\=</tt>)
-<li><tt>\vec{o}</tt> is a vector (arrow) over the letter
-</ul>
-
-<h2><a href="ltx-58.html">Tabbing environment</a></h2>
-Some of the accent marks used in running text have other uses in
-the <a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing environment</a>. In that
-case they can be created with the following command:
-<ul>
-<li><tt>\a'</tt> for an acute accent
-<li><tt>\a`</tt> for a grave accent
-<li><tt>\a=</tt> for a macron accent
-</ul>
-<hr>
-Related topics:
-<ul>
-<li><a href="ltx-405.html">Greek letters</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-402.html">Ligatures and Non-English symbols</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-407.html">Miscellaneous symbols</a>
-<p>
-<li><a href="ltx-287.html"><tt>\overbrace</tt></a>
-<li><a href="ltx-288.html"><tt>\overline</tt></a>
-<p>
-<li><a href="ltx-115.html#math">Math environment</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a> and
- <a href="ltx-117.html">Math Symbols</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-408.html">Variable size symbols</a>
-</ul>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 20 Oct 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-402.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-402.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 500c3d7b99a..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-402.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,41 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head>
-<title>Non-English characters and ligatures</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Non-English characters and ligatures</font></h1>
-
-These commands may be used only in paragraph or LR mode.<br>
-<ul>
-<li><tt>\ae</tt> small ae ligature (diphthong), &aelig;
-<li><tt>\AE</tt> capital ae ligature, &AElig;
-<li><tt>\oe</tt> small oe ligature
-<li><tt>\OE</tt> capital OE ligature
-<li><tt>\aa</tt> small a, ring, &aring;
-<li><tt>\AA</tt> capital A, ring, &Aring;
-<li><tt>\o</tt> small o, slash, &oslash;
-<li><tt>\O</tt> capital O, slash, &Oslash;
-<li><tt>\ss</tt> German sz ligature, &szlig;
-</ul>
-<p>
-<h2>Non-English punctuation</h2>
-An inverted "question mark" is made by <tt>?`</tt>. It will also be
-generated by a <tt>&gt;</tt> in text mode.
-<p>
-An inverted "exclamation point" is made by <tt>!`</tt>. It will also be
-generated by a <tt>&lt;</tt> in text mode.
-<hr>
-Related topics:
-<ul>
-<li> <a href="ltx-401.html">Accents</a>,
-<li> <a href="ltx-405.html">Greek letters</a>
-<li> <a href="ltx-407.html">Miscellaneous symbols</a>
-</ul>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jun 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-403.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-403.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 0f74a6048f1..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-403.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,116 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head>
-<title>Delimiters</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Delimiters</font></h1>
-Delimiters are objects which act logically like parentheses. These can
-be used only in math mode.
-<p>
-The delimiters recognized by LaTeX include
-<ul>
-<li><tt>(</tt> (left parenthesis)
-<li><tt>)</tt> (right parenthesis)
-<li><tt>[</tt> (left bracket)
-<li><tt>]</tt> (right bracket)
-<li><tt>\{</tt> (left brace)
-<li><tt>\}</tt> (right brace)
-<li><tt>|</tt> (vertical line)
-<li><tt>\vert</tt> (vertical line)
-<li><tt>\|</tt> (double vertical lines)
-<li><tt>\Vert</tt> (double vertical lines)
-<li><tt>/</tt> (slash)
-<li><tt><a href="ltx-164.html">\backslash</a></tt> (backslash)
-<li><tt>\langle</tt> (left angle bracket)
-<li><tt>\rangle</tt> (right angle bracket)
-<li><tt>\uparrow</tt> (uparrow)
-<li><tt>\downarrow</tt> (down arrow)
-<li><tt>\updownarrow</tt> (up/down arrow)
-</ul>
-
-<h2><a name="big">Making delimiters the right size</a></h2>
-Delimiters in formulas should be big enough to "fit" around the formulas
-they delimit (for example arround arrays).
-To obtain "stretchable" delimiters (LaTeX makes them the
-appropriate size) type a <tt>\left</tt> or <tt>\right</tt> command before
-the delimiter. <tt>\left</tt> and <tt>\right</tt> commands must come in
-matching pairs, although the delimiters themselves need not be the same.
-Thus, <pre> \left \{ ... \right \[ </pre> produces a legal pair.
-In cases where only one delimiter is desired, it
-is possible to make the matching delimiter "invisible" by typing a
-period (<tt>.</tt>) after the command, i.e.,
-<tt>\left.</tt> or <tt>\right.</tt>.
-<p>
-In an <a href="ltx-223.html">eqnarray environment</a> the matching <tt>\left</tt>
-and <tt>\right</tt> cannot be split between lines and it may be necessary to
-use an "invisible" <tt>\right.</tt> and <tt>\left.</tt> to terminate and
-begin parts on different lines. In this case a second problem may arise,
-since the size of the delimiters will be chosen only for the
-<strong>local part</strong>, so that the size of the <strong>visible</strong>
-"left" and "right" delimiters might not match.
-The solution is to trick LaTeX into thinking
-that both parts have the same vertical height. This can be done by placing
-a strut, that is a zero-width <a href="ltx-306.html"><tt>\rule</tt></a>. It
-can also be accomplished with the <tt>\vphantom</tt> command, which I have
-not found documented, but which appears to work.
-<p>
-<pre><tt>\vphantom{construct}</tt></pre>
-creates a zero-width object with the height of <tt>construct</tt>. The
-argument can contain things such as <a href="ltx-235.html"><tt>\frac</tt></a>
-or the <a href="ltx-408.html">variable size math symbols</a> and should
-be chosen according to what is in the section with the delimiter you want to match.
-
-<h2>Some examples</h2>
-<h3>A six-j symbol</h3>
-<pre>
- <tt>\[ \left<a href="ltx-164.html">\{</a>
- \begin{<a href="ltx-202.html">array</a>}{ccc}
- a &amp; b &amp; c <a href="ltx-181.html">\\</a>
- d &amp; e &amp; f \end{array}
- \right<a href="ltx-164.html">\}</a> \]</tt>
-</pre>
-This should be displayed something like (insofar as it can be rendered in
-"ascii art"):
-<pre>
- ( a b c )
- - -
- ( d e f )
-</pre>
-Note that the <tt>\[ ... \]</tt> set this off as <a href="ltx-421.html">
-Display Math</a>, and that the <a href="ltx-202.html">Array Environment</a>
-is used to generate the three centered columns inside the braces.
-<h3>A "multiple choice" equation</h3>
-<pre>
- <tt>\[ f(x) =
- \left\{ \begin{array}{l}
- 0, x &lt; 0 \\ 1, x = 0 \\
- 2, x &gt; 0 \end{array} \right. \]</tt>
-</pre>
-will be displayed as
-<pre>
-<tt> ( 0, x &lt; 0
- f(x) = - 1, x = 0
- ( 2, x &gt; 0</tt>
-</pre>
-Note that the "invisible" <tt>\right</tt> delimiter is specified using
-a "period".
-<hr>
-See also:
-See also <a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a>,
- <a href="ltx-117.html">Math Symbols</a>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="ltx-404.html">Binary and relational operators</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-115.html">Math formulas</a>,
-<li><a href="ltx-202.html">Arrays</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-406.html">Arrows</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-408.html">Variable size symbols (sums, integrals, etc.)</a>
-</ul>
-<hr>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 28 Nov 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-404.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-404.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 9016b0b2018..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-404.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,75 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head>
-<title>Binary and relational opertors</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Binary and relational operators</font></h1>
-Some "math" symbols are obtained by typing the corresponding keyboard
-character. Examples include
-<pre> + - = &lt; &gt; </pre>
-<strong>Note:</strong> plus, minus, and equal sign may be used in
-either text or math mode, but &lt; and &gt; are math mode only
-(they produce inverted exclamation and question marks, respectively,
-in text mode).
-<p>
-The following commands may be used only in math mode.
-
-<ul>
-<li><tt>\pm</tt> plus or minus sign
-<li><tt>\mp</tt> minus or plus sign
-<li><tt>\times</tt> times (an "x")
-<li><tt>\div</tt> divided by sign
-<li><tt>\ast</tt> an asterisk (centered)
-<li><tt>\star</tt> a five-point star (centered)
-<li><tt>\bullet</tt> a bullet
-<li><tt>\circ</tt> an open bullet
-<li><tt>\cdot</tt> a centered dot (see also,
- <a href="ltx-207.html"><tt>\cdots</tt></a>)
-<p>
-<li><tt>\leq</tt> less than or equal to
-<li><tt>\ll</tt> much less than
-<li><tt>\subset</tt> is a subset of
-<li><tt>\geq</tt> greater than or equal to
-<li><tt>\gg</tt> much greater than
-<li><tt>\equiv</tt> equivalence symbol
-<li><tt>\sim</tt> similar to
-<li><tt>\simeq</tt> similar or equal to
-<li><tt>\approx</tt> approximately equal to
-<li><tt>\neq</tt> not equal to
-<li><tt>\per</tt> "perpendicular to" symbols
-<li><tt>\propto</tt> proportional to
-</ul>
-<p>
-Note that "greater than" and "less than" are obtained simply by
-entering <tt>&gt;</tt> and <tt>&lt;</tt>.
-<p>
-A slash, indicating <a name=not>"not"</a> can be placed through a symbol
-(or a letter) with the <tt>\not</tt> command. For example, not less than is
-<pre> \not&lt;
-</pre>
-and not less than or equal to is
-<pre> \not\leq
-</pre>
-If the slash isn't properly positioned it can be moved by putting a
-<a href="ltx-118.html">math mode spacing command</a> between the <tt>\not</tt>
-and the symbol.
-<p>
-Related topics:
-<ul>
-<li><a href="ltx-406.html">Arrows</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-403.html">Delimiters</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-405.html">Greek letters</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-407.html">Miscellaneous symbols</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-408.html">Variable size symbols</a> (sums, integrals, etc.)
-</ul>
-<hr>
-See also <a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a>,
- <a href="ltx-117.html">Math Symbols</a><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 7Jul 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-405.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-405.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 2d7bda376e4..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-405.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,72 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head>
-<title>Greek letters</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Greek letters</font></h1>
-
-These commands may be used only in math mode.
-<h2>Lower case</h2>
-<ul>
-<li><tt>\alpha</tt>
-<li><tt>\beta</tt>
-<li><tt>\gamma</tt>
-<li><tt>\delta</tt>
-<li><tt>\epsilon</tt>
-<li><tt>\varepsilon</tt> (variation, script-like)
-<li><tt>\zeta</tt>
-<li><tt>\eta</tt>
-<li><tt>\theta</tt>
-<li><tt>\vartheta</tt> (variation, script-like)
-<li><tt>\iota</tt>
-<li><tt>\kappa</tt>
-<li><tt>\lambda</tt>
-<li><tt>\mu</tt>
-<li><tt>\nu</tt>
-<li><tt>\xi</tt>
-<li><tt>\pi</tt>
-<li><tt>\varpi</tt> (variation)
-<li><tt>\rho</tt>
-<li><tt>\varrho</tt> (variation, with the tail)
-<li><tt>\sigma</tt>
-<li><tt>\varsigma</tt> (variation, script-like)
-<li><tt>\tau</tt>
-<li><tt>\upsilon</tt>
-<li><tt>\phi</tt>
-<li><tt>\varphi</tt> (variation, script-like)
-<li><tt>\chi</tt>
-<li><tt>\psi</tt>
-<li><tt>\omega</tt>
-</ul>
-<h2>Capital letters</h2>
-<ul>
-<li><tt>\Gamma</tt>
-<li><tt>\Delta</tt>
-<li><tt>\Theta</tt>
-<li><tt>\Lambda</tt>
-<li><tt>\Xi</tt>
-<li><tt>\Pi</tt>
-<li><tt>\Sigma</tt>
-<li><tt>\Upsilon</tt>
-<li><tt>\Phi</tt>
-<li><tt>\Psi</tt>
-<li><tt>\Omega</tt>
-</ul>
-<hr>
-See also:
-See also <a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a>,
- <a href="ltx-117.html">Math Symbols</a>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="ltx-401.html">Accents</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-402.html">Ligatures and Non-English symbols</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-407.html">Miscellaneous symbols</a>
-<li><a href="mathfonts.html">Math fonts and styles</a>
-</ul>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 7 Jul 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-406.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-406.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 24c60007829..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-406.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,58 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head>
-<title>Arrows</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Arrows</font></h1>
-Latex provides commands for all sorts of arrows. The following commands
-are used only in math mode.
-<p>
-In general the command names are created from "left", "right", "up", or
-"down". "leftright" gives a double headed arrow.
-Prefacing with "long" gives a longer arrow. Capitalizing the
-first letter gives a double-shanked arrow.
-<p>
-Examples are
-<ul>
-<li><tt>\leftarrow</tt>
-<li><tt>\Leftarrow</tt>
-<li><tt>\longleftarrow</tt>
-<li><tt>\Longleftarrow</tt>
-<p>
-<li><tt>\rightarrow</tt>
-<li><tt>\Rightarrow</tt>
-<li><tt>\longrightarrow</tt>
-<li><tt>\Longrightarrow</tt>
-<p>
-<li><tt>\leftrightarrow</tt>
-<li><tt>\Leftrightarrow</tt>
-<li><tt>\longleftrightarrow</tt>
-<p>
-<li><tt>\uparrow</tt>
-<li><tt>\downarrow</tt>
-<li><tt>\Uparrow</tt>
-<p>
-<li><tt>\nearrow</tt> points from southwest to northeast
-<li><tt>\searrow</tt> points from northwest to southeast
-<li><tt>\swarrow</tt> points from northeast to southwest
-<li><tt>\nwarrow</tt> points from southeast to northwest
-</ul>
-The <a href="stackrel.html"><tt>\stackrel</tt></a> command is
-useful for putting things over or under your arrow.
-<hr>
-See also:
-See also <a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a>,
- <a href="ltx-117.html">Math Symbols</a>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="ltx-404.html">Binary and relational operators</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-405.html">Greek letters</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-407.html">Miscellaneous symbols</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-408.html">Variable size symbols</a> (sums, integrals, etc.)
-</ul>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 7 Jull 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-407.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-407.html
deleted file mode 100644
index e2340140b50..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-407.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,90 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head>
-<title>Miscellaneous symbols</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Miscellaneous symbols</font></h1>
-
-<h2>Some symbols for math</h2>
-The following symbols are also used only in math mode
-<ul>
-<li><tt>\aleph</tt> Hebrew aleph
-<li><tt>\hbar</tt> h-bar, Planck's constant
-<li><tt>\imath</tt> variation on "i"; no dot
-<ul><li>See also <a href="ltx-401.html"><tt>\i</tt></a></ul>
-<li><tt>\jmath</tt> variation on "j"; no dot
-<ul><li>See also <a href="ltx-401.html"><tt>\j</tt></a></ul>
-<li><tt>\ell</tt> script (loop) "l"
-<li><tt>\wp</tt> fancy script lowercase "P"
-<li><tt>\Re</tt> script capital "R" ("Real")
-<li><tt>\Im</tt> script capital "I" ("Imaginary")
-<li><tt>\prime</tt> prime (also obtained by typing <tt>'</tt>)
-<li><tt>\nabla</tt> inverted capital Delta
-<li><tt>\surd</tt> radical (square root) symbol
-<li><tt>\angle</tt> angle symbol
-<li><tt>\forall</tt> "for all" (inverted A)
-<li><tt>\exists</tt> "exists" (left-facing E)
-<li><a href="ltx-164.html"><tt>\backslash</tt></a> backslash
-<li><tt>\partial</tt> partial derivative symbol
-<li><tt>\infty</tt> infinity symbol
-<li><tt>\triangle</tt> open triangle symbol
-<li><tt>\Box</tt> open square
-<li><tt>\Diamond</tt> open diamond
-<p>
-<li><tt>\flat</tt> music: flat symbol
-<li><tt>\natural</tt> music: natural symbol
-<li><tt>\sharp</tt> music: sharp symbol
-<p>
-<li><tt>\clubsuit</tt> playing cards: club suit symbol
-<li><tt>\diamondsuit</tt> playing cards: diamond suit symbol
-<li><tt>\heartsuit</tt> playing cards: heart suit symbol
-<li><tt>\spadesuit</tt> playing cards: space suit symbol
-</ul>
-
-<h2>Some other symbols</h2>
-The following symbols can be used in any mode.
-<ul>
-<li><tt>\dag</tt> dagger
-<li><tt>\ddag</tt> double dagger
-<li><tt>\S</tt> section symbol
-<li><tt>\P</tt> paragraph symbol
-<li><tt>\copyright</tt> copyright symbol
-<li><tt>\pounds</tt> British pound sterling symbol
-</ul>
-
-<h2>Calligraphic style letters</h2>
-Twenty-six calligraphic letters are provided (the upper case alphabet). These
-can only be used in math mode.<p>
-In LaTeX 2.09 they are produced with the <tt>\cal</tt>
-<a href="declarations.html">declaration</a>
-<pre>
- <tt>${\cal A}$</tt>
-</pre>
-
- In LaTeX2e they are obtained with the <tt>\mathcal</tt> command:
-<pre>
- <tt>$\mathcal{CAL}$</tt>
-</pre>
-<hr>
-See also:
-See also <a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a>,
- <a href="ltx-117.html">Math Symbols</a>,
- <a href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</a>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="ltx-406.html">Arrows</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-403.html">Delimiters</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-404.html">Binary and relational operators</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-405.html">Greek letters</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-408.html">Variable size symbols</a> (sums, integrals, etc.)
-<li><a href="mathfonts.html">Math fonts and styles</a>
-<p>
-<li><a href="stackrel.html"><tt>\stackrel</tt></a> (putting things above
- other things)
-</ul>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 7 Jul 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-408.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-408.html
deleted file mode 100644
index ede35a461ac..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-408.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,79 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head>
-<title>Variable size symbols</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Variable size symbols</font></h1>
-The size of some mathematical symbols, notably summation signs, product signs, and
-integral signs, depends on the environment in which they
-appear (i.e., <tt>displaymath</tt> as opposed to <tt>math</tt> environments;
-see <a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a> and
-<a href="mathfonts.html">Math Fonts and Styles</a>).
-<p>
-These include
-<ul>
-<li><tt>\sum</tt> a summation sign (capital sigma)
-<li><tt>\prod</tt> a product (capital pi)
-<li><tt>\coprod</tt> a coproduct (inverted capital pi)
-<li><tt>\int</tt> an integral sign
-<li><tt>\oint</tt> a surface (circular) integral sign
-<li><tt>\bigcup</tt> big "U"
-<li><tt>\bigcap</tt> big inverted "U"
-<li><tt>\bigvee</tt> big "V"
-<li><tt>\bigwedge</tt> big inverted "V"
-<li><tt>\bigodot</tt> big "O" with dot at center
-<li><tt>\bigotimes</tt> big "O" with cross inside
-<li><tt>\bigoplus</tt> big "O" with a + inside
-<li><tt>\biguplus</tt> big "U" with a + inside
-</ul>
-The <a href="ltx-319.html"><tt>\sqrt</tt></a> command also produces a variable
-size symbol appropriate for the size of hte radicand argument.
-<p>
-<p>
-The "limits" associated with these symbols are entered as
-<a href="ltx-179.html">subscripts</a> for entries appearing below the
-symbol and as <a href="ltx-180.html">superscripts</a> for entries appearing
-above the symbol.
-For example the sum from n=0 to infinity of x<sub>n</sub> would be entered as
-<pre>
- \sum_{n=0}^{<a href="ltx-407.html">\infty</a>} x_{n}
-</pre>
-The actual placement of the limits depends on whether this
-is in <tt>displaymath</tt> mode in which case they are placed below/above
-or in <tt>math</tt> mode in running text in which case they are placed as regular
-subscripts and superscripts.
-<p>
-Note that it is possible to treat several of these symbols (a common example
-would be a double sum) as a single symbol for placing limits above and/or
-below by using the <a href="stackrel.html#mathop"><tt>\mathop</tt></a> command.
-<p>
-"Hats" and "tildes" over symbols which stretch (as best they can) to
-the correct size for their arguments are produced by
-<a href="ltx-401.html#math"><tt>\widehat</tt> and <tt>\widetilde</tt></a>.
-<hr>
-Related topics:
-<ul>
-<li><a href="ltx-403.html">Delimiters</a> can be made variable sized
-<li><a href="mathfonts.html">Math fonts and styles</a>
-<p>
-<li><a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-117.html">Math Symbols</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-406.html">Arrows</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-404.html">Binary and relational operators</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-409.html">Math function symbols</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-407.html">Miscellaneous symbols</a>
-<p>
-<li><a href="ltx-403.html#big"><tt>\left</tt></a>
-<li><a href="ltx-403.html#big"><tt>\right</tt></a>
-<li><a href="ltx-319.html"><tt>\sqrt</tt></a>
-<li><a href="stackrel.html"><tt>\stackrel</tt> and <tt>\mathop</tt></a>
-</ul>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 28 Nov 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-409.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-409.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 468ee7918d0..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-409.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,76 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head>
-<title>Math function symbols</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Math function symbols</font></h1>
-Functions like "log" or "cos" are normally used in math mode. However, in
-math mode strings of letters are treated as a product of variables, which
-would normally be displayed in math italics rather than a text font which
-would be appropriate for these functions. To
-get proper display of such functions they are generated with LaTeX commands.
-<p>
-Some of these commands are
-<ul>
-<li><tt>\arccos</tt>
-<li><tt>\arcsin</tt>
-<li><tt>\arctan</tt>
-<li><tt>\cos</tt>
-<li><tt>\cosh</tt>
-<li><tt>\cot</tt>
-<li><tt>\coth</tt>
-<li><tt>\csc</tt>
-<li><tt>\deg</tt>
-<li><tt>\det</tt>
-<li><tt>\dim</tt>
-<li><tt>\exp</tt>
-<li><tt>\gcd</tt>
-<li><tt>\hom</tt>
-<li><tt>\inf</tt>
-<li><tt>\ker</tt>
-<li><tt>\lg</tt>
-<li><tt>\lim</tt>
-<li><tt>\liminf</tt>
-<li><tt>\limsup</tt>
-<li><tt>\ln</tt>
-<li><tt>\log</tt>
-<li><tt>\max</tt>
-<li><tt>\min</tt>
-<li><tt>\sec</tt>
-<li><tt>\sin</tt>
-<li><tt>\sinh</tt>
-<li><tt>\sup</tt>
-<li><tt>\tan</tt>
-<li><tt>\tanh</tt>
-</ul>
-Two commands are provided for the "modulus" function
-<ul>
-<li><tt>\bmod</tt>
-<li><tt>\pmod{}</tt>
-</ul>
-The former would be used to write "a mod b" as
-<pre> a \bmod b
-</pre>
-and the latter, which requires an argument that is displayed in parentheses,
-would be used to write "n = i (mod j)" as
-<pre> n = i \pmod{j}
-</pre>
-
-<p>
-Related topics:
-<ul>
-<li><a href="ltx-406.html">Arrows</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-404.html">Binary and relational operators</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-403.html">Delimiters</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-407.html">Miscellaneous symbols</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-408.html">Variable size symbols</a>
-</ul>
-<hr>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 25 April 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-420.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-420.html
deleted file mode 100644
index a2f26a22b28..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-420.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,26 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX Abstract Environment</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Abstract environment</font></h1>
-In the article or report <a href="ltx-22.html">document style</a>, the
-abstract is produced by the abstract environment:
-<pre>
- <tt>\begin{abstract}
- Abstract text, set in the usual
- LaTeX paragraph mode.
-
- An empy line, for example, specifies
- a new paragraph
- \end{abstract}</tt>
-</pre>
-The abstract is typically set with a narrower page margin.
-
-<hr>
-See also <a href="ltx-27.html">LaTeX environments</a><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 8 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-421.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-421.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 8f92d8e2580..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-421.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,54 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX Displaymath</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Displaymath</font></h1>
-
- There are four environments that put LaTeX in math mode:
- <a href="ltx-115.html#math">math</a>,
- displaymath, <a href="ltx-223.html">eqnarray</a>,
- and <a href="ltx-224.html">equation</a>.
- The math environment is for formulas that
- appear right in the text. The displaymath and equation environments are
- for formulas that appear on their own line; they differ only insofar
- as the latter prints an equation number. LaTeX will <strong>not</strong>
- break lines in displaymath or equation environments unless told to do
- so with a <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a> command.
-<p>
- The displaymath environment can be entered by
-<pre>
- <tt>\begin{displaymath}
- math equation \\
- second line of math equation
- \end{displaymath}</tt>
-</pre>
-Because displaymath may be used frequently to display relatively
-short equations, there are convenient alternative forms:
-<pre>
- <tt>\[ displayed math equation \]</tt>
-</pre>
-or (the following does not seem to be well documented, but appears to work)
-<pre>
- <tt>$$ dispalyed math equation $$</tt>
-</pre>
-<hr>
-Related topics
-<ul>
-<li><a href="ltx-115.html#math">Math environment</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-223.html">Eqnarray environment</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-224.html">Equation environment</a>
-<p>
-<li><a href="ltx-130.html">LaTeX Modes</a>
-<p>
-<li><A href="ltx-117.html">Math Symbols</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-179.html">Subscripts</A> and
- <a href="ltx-180.html">Superscripts</a>
-<li><A href="ltx-118.html">Spacing in Math Mode</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</A>
-</ul>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jun 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-43.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-43.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 61de1ff618a..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-43.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,107 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX picture</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Picture environment</font></h1>
-<p>
-<p><pre>
- \begin{picture}(width,height)(x-offset,y-offset)
- ...
- picture commands
- ...
- \end{picture}
-</pre>
-<p>
- The picture environment allows you to create just about any kind of
- picture you want containing text, lines, arrows and circles. You tell
- LaTeX where to put things in the picture by specifying their
- coordinates. A coordinate is a number that may have a decimal point
- and a minus sign (<tt>-</tt>), for example, 5, 2.3, or -3.1416. A coordinate
- specifies a length in multiples of the unit length
- <a href="unitlength.html"><tt>\unitlength</tt></a>, so if
- <tt>\unitlength</tt> has been set to 1cm, then the coordinate 2.54 specifies a
- length of 2.54 centimeters. You can change the value of <tt>\unitlength</tt>
- anywhere you want, using the
- <a href="ltx-88.html"><tt>\setlength</tt></a> command,
- but it should be set before the beginning of the picture environment since
- strange things may happen if you try changing it inside the picture environment.
-<p>
- A position is a pair of coordinates, such as (2.4,-5), specifying the
- point with x-coordinate = 2.4 and y-coordinate = -5. Coordinates are
- specified in the usual way with respect to an origin, which is
- normally at the lower-left corner of the picture. Note that when a
- position appears as an argument, it is not enclosed in braces; the
- parentheses serve to delimit the argument.
-<p>
- The picture environment has one mandatory argument, which
- specifies the size of the picture. The environment
- produces a rectangular box with width and height determined by this
- argument's two values.
-<p>
- The picture environment also has an optional position argument,
- following the size argument, that can change the origin. (Unlike
- ordinary optional arguments, this argument is not contained in square
- brackets.) The optional argument gives the coordinates of the point at
- the lower-left corner of the picture (thereby determining the origin).
- For example, if
- <a href="unitlength.html"><tt>\unitlength</tt></a> has been set to 1mm,
- the command
-<p>
-<p><pre>
- \begin{picture}(100,200)(10,20)
-</pre>
- produces a picture of width 100 millimeters and height 200
- millimeters, whose lower-left corner is the point (10,20) and whose
- upper-right corner is therefore the point (110,220).
- Typically one initially omits the optional argument, leaving the
- origin at the lower-left corner. If you then want to modify your
- picture by shifting everything, you just add the appropriate optional
- argument.
-<p>
- The environment's mandatory argument determines the nominal size of
- the picture. This need bear no relation to how large the picture
- really is; LaTeX will happily allow you to put things outside the
- picture, or even off the page. The picture's nominal size is used by
- TeX in determining how much room to leave for it.
-<p>
- Everything that appears in a picture is drawn by the
- <a href="ltx-296.html"><tt>\put</tt></a> command. The
- command
-<pre>
- \put (11.3,-.3){obj}
-</pre>
- puts the object specified by <tt>obj</tt> in the picture, with its reference
- point at coordinates (11.3,-.3). The reference points for various
- objects will be described below.
-<p>
- The <a href="ltx-296.html"><tt>\put</tt></a>
- command creates an LR box. You can put anything in the text
- argument of the <tt>\put</tt> command that you'd put into the argument
- of an <a href="ltx-265.html"><tt>\mbox</tt></a>
- (or related) command. When you do this, the reference point
- will be the lower left corner of the box.
-<p>
-See also
-<ul>
-<li><A href="ltx-210.html"><tt>\circle</tt></A>
-<li><A href="ltx-216.html"><tt>\dashbox</tt></A>
-<li><A href="ltx-236.html"><tt>\frame</tt></A>
-<li><A href="ltx-237.html"><tt>\framebox</tt></A>
-<li><A href="ltx-257.html"><tt>\line</tt></A>
-<li><A href="ltx-259.html"><tt>\linethickness</tt></A>
-<li><A href="ltx-262.html"><tt>\makebox</tt></A>
-<li><A href="ltx-269.html"><tt>\multiput</tt></A>
-<li><A href="ltx-286.html"><tt>\oval</tt></A>
-<li><A href="ltx-296.html"><tt>\put</tt></A>
-<li><A href="ltx-314.html"><tt>\shortstack</tt></A>
-<li><a href="unitlength.html"><tt>\unitlength</tt></a>
-<li><A href="ltx-341.html"><tt>\vector</tt></A>
-<p>
-<li><a href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</a>
-</ul>
-Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 12 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-430.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-430.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 6d7c78c1e97..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-430.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,25 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head>
-<title>Help On LaTeX Dashes</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Dashes</font></h1>
-LaTeX provides for three sizes of dashes which are indicated by
-typing one, two, or three consecutive dashes in the text.
-<ul>
-<li>a hyphenation dash, as in X-ray, is a single dash
-<li>a dash between limits, as in 1--2, is a double dash
-<li>a parenthetical punctuation --- such as this --- is a triple dash
-</ul>
-Note that this applies to paragraph mode. In math mode each <tt>-</tt>
-is interpreted as a minus sign.
-<hr>
-See also <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and boxes</a>,
- <a href="ltx-130.html">Modes</a><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 11 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-431.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-431.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 3dd0c9f8d0f..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-431.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,47 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \&lt;space&gt;</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\&lt;space&gt;</font></h1>
-LaTeX normally leaves a little extra space after sentences. However, it
-uses a rather simple rule for determining whether a period ends a
-sentence: it assumes that periods end sentences <em>unless</em> they
-follow an upper case letter. To let LaTeX know that a period does
-<em>not</em> end a sentence after, for example, an abbreviation, use:
-<p>
- <tt>\&lt;space&gt;</tt>
-<p>
-For example,
-<pre>
- <tt>Jones, et al.\ (1993) ...</tt>
-</pre>
-Such a space may also be needed after a text-producing command,
-such as one defined with <a href="ltx-18.html"><tt>\newcommand</tt></a>.
-As an example, consider
-<pre>
- <tt>\newcommand{\water}{H$_2$O}
- \water, \water\ everywhere, but not a drop ...</tt>
-</pre>
-The first <tt>\water</tt> command is terminated by the comma;
-note that LaTeX does not leave a space between the first <tt>\water</tt>
-and the comma -- as desired -- and the trailing space is treated as an
-interword space. However, the second <tt>\water</tt> command
-is terminated by the space, but LaTeX would not leave an extra space after
-this, running "H<sub>2</sub>Owater" into one word, except for the
-trailing <tt>\ </tt>.
-<p>
-An alternate way to indicate the end of a command so that a trailing
-space is interpreted as an interword space is to use braces:
-<pre>
- <tt>\water, \water{} everywhere, ...</tt>
-</pre>
-<hr>
-See <a href="ltx-432.html"><tt>\@.</tt></a> for the opposite case<br>
-See also <A href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</A>,
- <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br>
-Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 26 Jun 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-432.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-432.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 325075dc2b7..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-432.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \@</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\@</font></h1>
-LaTeX normally leaves a little extra space after punctuation, such as the
-period which ends a sentence. However, it
-uses a rather simple rule for determining whether a period ends a
-sentence: it assumes that periods end sentences <em>unless</em> they
-follow an upper case letter. To tell LaTeX to insert extra space after
-punctuation which follows an upper case letter, precede the punctuation
-by <tt>\@</tt>.
-<p>
-For example:
-<pre>
- <tt>It is I\@.</tt>
-</pre>
-would not be considered to be a sentence by LaTeX except for the <tt>\@</tt>.
-<hr>
-See also <a href="ltx-431.html"><tt>\&lt;space&gt;</tt></a> for the opposite case<br>
-See also <A href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</A><br>
-Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 10 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-433.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-433.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 69134f59518..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-433.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,26 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head>
-<title>Help On Quotation Marks</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Quotation Marks</font></h1>
-LaTeX distinguishes between left (<tt>`</tt>) and right (<tt>'</tt>)
-quotation marks; the former corresponds to the "grave" generally found
-to the left of the numbers at top of the keyboard, and the latter
-corresponds to the usual single quote mark.
-<p>
-These symbols, by themselves, produce left and right single quotes.
-<p>
-Double quote are produced by typing two in a row: <tt>``text''</tt>.
-<p>
-To separate consecutive single and double quotes, use a
-<a href="ltx-185.html"><tt>\,</tt></a>.
-<hr>
-See also <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and boxes</a><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 10 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-434.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-434.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 3851d4499d9..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-434.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,30 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head>
-<title>Help Comments in file</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Comments in file</font></h1>
-You can insert comments into the LaTeX input (*.tex) file. Anything following
-a percent sign (<tt>%</tt>) until the end of the line is ignored by the
-LaTeX processor.
-<p>
-In fact, the <tt>%</tt> ends a line without generating a space;
-an end-of-line in LaTeX input is normally equivalent to a space.
-Thus, for example, it allows one to split a word
-over lines without inserting a break. For example
-<pre>
- <tt> this is an extr%
- ordinarily long word</tt>
-</pre>
-would produce "this is an extraordinarily long word" with no breaks.
-However, a <strong>command</strong> cannot be split over lines this way.
-<hr>
-See also <a href="ltx-164.html">Special Characters</a>,
-<a href="input.html">Input to LaTeX</a><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 1 Jun 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-58.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-58.html
deleted file mode 100644
index d5624173888..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-58.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,60 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX tabbing</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">tabbing</font></h1>
-<p><pre>
- \begin{tabbing}
- text \= more text \= still more text \= last text \\
- second row \&gt; \&gt; more \\
- ....
- ....
- \end{tabbing}
-</pre>
- The tabbing environment provides a way to align text in columns. It
- works by setting tab stops and tabbing to them much the way you do
- with an ordinary typewriter.
-<p>
- The <a href="ltx-68.html">tabular</a> environment also aligns text in
- columns, but there are several important differences.
- <ul>
- <li> The tabular environment can be used in any <a href="ltx-130.html">mode</a>
- whereas the tabbing environment can be used only in paragraph
- <a href="ltx-130.html">mode</a> and it starts a new paragraph.
-<p>
- <li>The tabular
- environment generates a box, which LaTeX treats as one (albeit very large)
- letter; it cannot be split across pages. A long tabbing environment can
- be split across pages.
-<p>
- <li>The width of columns in a tabular environment is determined automatically
- by LaTeX; in the tabbing environment this is done by setting tab stops.
-</ul>
-<H2>Tabbing commands</H2>
-<ul>
-<li><A href="ltx-187.html"><tt>\=</tt></A> (set tab)
-<li><A href="ltx-188.html"><tt>\&gt;</tt></A> (advance to next tab stop)
-<li><A href="ltx-189.html"><tt>\&lt;</tt></A>
-<li><A href="ltx-190.html"><tt>\+</tt></A> (indent; move margin right)
-<li><A href="ltx-182.html"><tt>\-</tt></A> (unindent; move margin left)
-<li><A href="ltx-191.html"><tt>\'</tt></A>
-<li><A href="ltx-192.html"><tt>\`</tt></A>
-<li><a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a> (end of line; newline)
-<li><A href="ltx-251.html"><tt>\kill</tt></A> (ignore preceding text; use only
- for spacing)
-</ul>
-The <a href="ltx-241.html"><tt>\hspace</tt></a> command is useful for
-controlling horizontal space in the tabbing environment.
-<p>
-Note that the commands <tt>\=</tt>, <tt>\'</tt>, and <tt>\`</tt>
-normally produce <a href="ltx-401.html">accents</a> over the subsequent
-letter. These commands are redefined in the tabbing environment;
-in this environment it is possible to get the accents by using
-<tt>\a=</tt>, <tt>\a'</tt>, and <tt>\a`</tt>, respectively.
-</body>
-<hr>
-Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 28 Nov 1995.
-</address>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-67.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-67.html
deleted file mode 100644
index eb5e016f1b1..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-67.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,49 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX table</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">table</font></h1>
-<p>
-<p><pre>
- \begin{table}[placement]
-
- body of the table
-
- <a href="caption.html">\caption{table title}</a>
- \end{table}
-</pre>
-<p>
-
- Tables are objects that are not part of the normal text, and are
- usually "floated" to a convenient place, like the top of a page.
- Tables will not be split between two pages.
-<p>
- Note that there is an *-form: <tt>\begin{table*} ... \end{table*}</tt>.
- This form will put the table in a single column when in two column mode;
- in one column mode it is identical to the non-* form
-<p>
- The optional argument [placement] determines where LaTeX will try to
- place your table. There are four places where LaTeX can possibly put
- a float:
-<ul>
-<li><TT>h</TT> Here - at the position in the text where the table
- environment appears.
-<li><TT>t</TT> Top - at the top of a text page.
-<li><TT>b</TT> Bottom - at the bottom of a text page.
-<li><TT>p</TT> Page of floats - on a separate float page, which is a page
- containing no text, only floats.
-</ul>
- The standard report and article styles use the default placement <tt>tbp</tt>.
-<p>
- The body of the table is made up of whatever text, LaTeX commands,
- etc., you wish.
-<p>
- The <a href="caption.html"><tt>\caption</tt></a> command allows you to title your table.
-<hr>
- See also <a href="ltx-68.html">tabular environment</a><br>
- Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 2 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-68.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-68.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 3926aafd653..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-68.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,149 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX tabular</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">tabular</font></h1>
-<pre>
- \begin{tabular}[pos]{cols}
- column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\
- ...
- ...
- \end{tabular}
-</pre>
-
-or
-
-<pre>
- \begin{tabular*}{width}[pos]{cols}
- column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\
- ...
- ...
- \end{tabular*}
-</pre>
-Note that the *-form takes an additional <tt>width</tt> mandatory argument
-which specifies the width of the tabular environment; in the regular form
-the width is determined by LaTeX from the contents of the tabular environment.
-<p>
- These environments produce a box consisting of a sequence of rows of
- items, aligned vertically in columns. The mandatory and optional
- arguments consist of:
-<ul>
- <li><TT>cols</TT> Specifies the column formatting. It consists of a
- sequence of the following specifiers, at least one for each
- of the columns.
- <ul>
- <li><tt>l</tt> - A column of left-aligned items.
- <li><tt>r</tt> - A column of right-aligned items.
- <li><tt>c</tt> - A column of centered items.
- <li><tt>p{wd}</tt> - Produces a column which can be multiple lines,
- with each item typeset in a parbox
- of width wd. It works as if each item were the argument of a
- <a href="ltx-294.html"><tt>\parbox[t]{wd}</tt></a>
- command. However, a
- <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a>
- may not appear in the item, except in
- the following situations: (i) inside an environment like
- minipage, array, or tabular, (ii) inside an explicit <tt>\parbox,</tt>
- or (iii) in the scope of a
- <a href="ltx-30.html"><tt>\centering</tt></a>,
- <a href="ltx-300.html"><tt>\raggedleft</tt></a>, or
- <a href="ltx-301.html"><tt>\raggedright</tt></a>
- declaration. The latter declarations must appear
- inside braces or an environment when used in a <tt>p</tt>-column
- element.
-<p>
- <li><tt>|</tt> - A vertical line the full height and depth of the
- environment.
- <li><tt>@{text}</tt> - This inserts <tt>text</tt> in every row.
- An @-expression
- suppresses the intercolumn space normally inserted between
- columns; any desired space between the inserted text and the
- adjacent items must be included in <tt>text</tt>.
- To force the spacing between two columns to be <tt>wdth</tt>,
- use an <tt>@{\hspace{wdth}}</tt> between the column specifiers.
- An <tt>\extracolsep{wd}</tt>
- command in an @-expression causes an extra space of width <tt>wd</tt>
- to appear to the left of all subsequent columns, until
- countermanded by another <tt>\extracolsep</tt> command. Unlike
- ordinary intercolumn space, this extra space is not
- suppressed by an @-expression. An <tt>\extracolsep</tt> command can
- be used only in an @-expression in the <tt>cols</tt> argument.
- <li><tt>*{num}{cols}</tt> - Equivalent to num copies of cols, where num is
- any positive integer and cols is any list of
- column-specifiers, which may contain another *-expression.
- </ul>
-<p>
- <li><TT>pos</TT> Specifies the vertical position of the whole tabular
- environment (recall that it is a <a href="ltx-143.html">box</a>).
- The default is to align the box on the center of the environment.
- <ul>
- <li><tt>t</tt> - align on top row
- <li><tt>b</tt> - align on bottom row
- </ul>
-<p>
- <li><TT>width</TT> Specifies the width of the tabular* environment. There
- must be rubber space between columns that can stretch to fill out
- the specified width.
-</ul>
-
- Note that <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a>
- must be used to specify the end of each line of the table, except the last.
- (It must be used after the last line if an
- <a href="ltx-239.html"><tt>\hline</tt></a> command is used to put a line
- at the bottom of the table.)
-
-<h2>Aligning on decimal points: an example of the @ specifier</h2>
-In scientific tables it is often desirable to align the columns on a decimal
-point. This can be done using the <tt>@</tt> <tt>col</tt> specifier and
-breaking the number into the integral part in a right-justified column and
-the fractional part in a left-justified column:
-<pre>
- The following input: will display as:
-
- <tt>\begin{tabular}{r@{.}l}
- 3&14159\\ 3.14159
- 16&2\\ 16.2
- 123$456\\ \end{tabular} 123.456 </tt>
-</pre>
-Note that the decimal point is replaced by the column separator, <tt>&amp;</tt>
-and that the <tt>@</tt>suppresses the intercolumn space
-
-<h2>Another example: centering and controlling table width</h2>
-LaTeX normally sets the width of the tabular environment to "natural"
-width, i.e., determined from the contents of the columns. For narrow
-tables it is sometimes more pleasing to make them wider. The
-<tt>tabular*</tt> environments allows for setting a width; however, it
-is necessary to have rubber space between colunmns that can expand to the
-specified width. This can often be most easily accomplished by using
-an <tt>\extracolsep{wdth}</tt> command in an @ specifier as shown in the
-example below which sets the table width to 75% of the text width.
-<p>
-This example also centers the table.
-<pre>
- <tt><a href="ltx-29.html">\begin{center}</a> % put inside center environment
- \begin{tabular*}{0.75<a href="textwidth.html">\textwidth</a>}%
- {@{\extracolsep{<a href="ltx-238.html">\fill</a>}}cccr}
- label 1 &amp; label 2 &amp; label 3 &amp; label 4 \\
- <a href="ltx-239.html">\hline</a> % put a line under headers
- item 1 &amp; item 2 &amp; item 3 &amp; item 4 \\
- ...
- \end{tabular*}
- \end{center}</tt>
-</pre>
-<H2>See also</H2>
-<ul>
-<li><A href="ltx-214.html">\cline</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-239.html">\hline</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-268.html">\multicolumn</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-346.html">\vline</A>
-</ul>
-<hr>
-See also <a href="ltx-67.html">table environment</a>,
- <a href="ltx-202.html">array environment</a>,
- <a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing environment</a>.<br>
-Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 22 Jun 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-73.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-73.html
deleted file mode 100644
index f89c5573985..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-73.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,78 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX thebibliography</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">thebibliography</font></h1>
-<p>
-<p><pre>
- \begin{thebibliography}{widest-label}
- <a href="ltx-205.html">\bibitem</a>[label]{cite_key}
- literature citation ...
- ....
- \end{thebibliography}
-</pre>
- The <tt>thebibliography</tt> environment produces a bibliography or reference
- list. In the article style, this reference list is labeled
- "References"; in the report style, it is labeled "Bibliography".
-<p>
-<TT>widest-label</TT> is text that, when printed, is approximately as wide
- as the widest item label produced by the <tt>\bibitem</tt> command.
-<p>
-The <tt>thebibliography</tt> environment is similar to the
-<a href="ltx-222.html"><tt>enumerate</tt></a> environment, except that
-items are associated with a <a href="ltx-205.html"><tt>\bibitem</tt></a>
-command and can be cross-referenced with the
-<A href="ltx-211.html"><tt>\cite</tt></A> command.
-
-<h2>An example</h2>
-In the text you generate a reference to the bibliographic list as follows:
-<pre>
- <tt> ... In the running text you might want to refer to
- Dow &amp; Jones\cite{DandJ} and then again you
- might not ... </tt>
-</pre>
-The <A href="ltx-211.html"><tt>\cite</tt></a>
-command will produce a sequence number by default,
-or the text from the optional <tt>label</tt> argument of
-<A href="ltx-205.html"><tt>\bibcite</tt></a>; this latter is useful
-if the style is to use, for example,
-the first three letters of the author's last name and a year, as in Dow29.
-<p>
-The associated item in the bibliography section at the end of the
-article would be generated by
-<pre>
- \begin{thebibliography}{99}
- ....
- \bibitem{DandJ} Dow, W. \& Jones, E.A.,
- {<a href="ltx-249.html">\it</a> Wall Street Journal},
- March 29, 1929.
- ....
- \end{thebibliography}
-</pre>
-Note that the <tt>widest-label</tt> parameter has been set assuming less than
-100 numbered items in the bibliography. Also note that the key,
-<tt>DandJ</tt>, is what connects the <A href="ltx-211.html"><tt>\cite</tt></A>
-and <A href="ltx-205.html"><tt>\bibitem</tt></A>.
-<p>
-If <tt>label</tt> is omitted, the numbers are generated sequentially by
-the <A href="ltx-205.html"><tt>\bibitem</tt></A> commands. Many journals
-want these in order of appearance in the text, so you have to sort this
-list to the proper order.
-
-<H2>See also</H2>
-<ul>
-<li><A href="ltx-205.html">\bibitem</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-211.html">\cite</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-279.html">\nocite</A>
-<li><a href="ltx-222.html">Enumerate</a> environment
-</ul>
-Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 17 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-77.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-77.html
deleted file mode 100644
index c5cf895b2ef..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-77.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,21 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX theorem</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">theorem</font></h1>
-<pre>
- \begin{theorem}
- theorem text
- \end{theorem}
-</pre>
- The theorem environment produces "Theorem x" in boldface followed by
- your theorem text.
-<hr>
-See also <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 27 Sep 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-78.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-78.html
deleted file mode 100644
index ef866ac8c08..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-78.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,29 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX titlepage</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">titlepage</font></h1>
-<pre>
- \begin{titlepage}
- text
- \end{titlepage}
-</pre>
- The titlepage environment creates a title page, i.e. a page with no
- printed page number or heading. It also causes the following page to
- be numbered page one. Text and formatting for the title page
- are left to you.
-<p>
- The <a href="ltx-330.html"><tt>\today</tt></a> command comes in handy for
- title pages. Other useful commands include those that change
- <a href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</a>, the
- <a href="ltx-29.html">Centering Environment</a>, and the
- <a href="ltx-420.html">Abstract Environment</a>.
-<hr>
-See also <a href="ltx-263.html"><tt>\maketitle</tt></a> and
- <a href="ltx-329.html"><tt>\title</tt></a><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 Nov 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-79.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-79.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 3e32e32e9ec..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-79.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,43 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX verbatim</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">verbatim</font></h1>
-<p>
-<p><pre>
- \begin{verbatim}
- text
- \end{verbatim}
-</pre>
-or
-<pre>
- \begin{verbatim*}
- text
- \end{verbatim*}
-</pre>
- The <tt>verbatim</tt> environment is a paragraph-making environment
- that gets
- LaTeX to print exactly what you type in. It turns LaTeX into a
- typewriter with carriage returns and blanks having the same effect
- that they would on a typewriter. The output looks exactly as it
- looks in the input file.
-<p>
- The difference between <tt>verbatim</tt> and <tt>verbatim*</tt>
- is that the latter prints spaces as "visual" spaces, i.e.,
- a short, squat "u".
-<p>
- The only text which cannot be placed in the <tt>verbatim</tt>
- environment is the 14-character sequence "\end{verbatim}".
-<p>
- The <tt>verbatim</tt> environment may <strong>not</strong> be used
- in the argument of another command. However, it <strong>can</strong> be
- placed inside a <a href="ltx-267.html">minipage environment</a> which
- allows you to manipulate it's placement.
-<hr>
-Also see <A href="ltx-342.html">\verb</A><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 4 Dec 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-81.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-81.html
deleted file mode 100644
index a2e8c47f6fa..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-81.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,20 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX verse</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">verse</font></h1>
-<pre>
- \begin{verse}
- text
- \end{verse}
-</pre>
- The verse environment is designed for poetry, though you may find
- other uses for it.
-<hr>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 27 Sep 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-82.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-82.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 1fe9fb6bf71..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-82.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,31 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX Footnotes</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Footnotes</font></h1>
-
- Footnotes can be produced in one of two ways. They can be produced
- with one command, the <tt>\footnote</tt> command. They can also be produced
- with two commands, the <tt>\footnotemark</tt> and the <tt>\footnotetext</tt>
- commands.
- See the specific commands, below, for information on why you would use one rather
- than another.
-<ul>
-<li><A href="ltx-231.html">\footnote</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-232.html">\footnotemark</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-234.html">\footnotetext</A>
-<p>
-<li><a href="ltx-233.html">\footnotesize</a> refers to a font size
-</ul>
- Note that footnotes associated with "floated objects" like
- <a href="ltx-67.html">tables</a> or <a href="ltx-225.html">figures</a>
- may have a problem insofar as the footnote might not follow the floated
- object. This can be alleviated by putting the object inside a
- <a href="ltx-267.html">minipage environment</a>.
-<hr>
-See also <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a><br>
-Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 22 Nov 1995.
-</address>
-</body></html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-86.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-86.html
deleted file mode 100644
index e04c6937cb2..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-86.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,111 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX Lengths</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Lengths</font></h1>
-<p>
- A length is a measure of distance. Many LaTeX commands take a length
- as an argument.
- A length of one inch is specified by typing <tt>1in</tt> or, to specify
- the same length using metric units, by typing <tt>2.54cm</tt>.
-
-<h2>Units</h2>
- LaTeX knows about the following common units.
-<ul>
-<li><tt>in</tt> - inches
-<li><tt>mm</tt> - millimeters
-<li><tt>cm</tt> - centimeters
-<li><tt>pt</tt> - points (about 1/72 inch)
-<li><tt>em</tt> - approximately the width of an "M"
- <em>in the current font</em>
-<li><tt>ex</tt> - approximately the height of an "x"
- <em>in the current font</em>
-</ul>
- And the following less common units
-<ul>
-<li><tt>pc</tt> - pica (12pt/pc)
-<li><tt>bp</tt> - big pt (72bp/in)
-<li><tt>dd</tt> - did&ocirc;t (1157dd=1238pt)
-<li><tt>cc</tt> - c&icirc;cero (12dd/cc)
-<li><tt>sp</tt> - scaled point (65536sp/pt)
-</ul>
- Lengths may also be negative, for example, <tt>-1.5em</tt>.<br>
- Note that the number <tt>0</tt> by itself is not a length;
- it must be specified as <tt>0in</tt> or <tt>0pt</tt>, for example.<br>
-
-<h2><a name="lencmd">Length commands</a></h2>
- A length may also be specified by a <em>length command</em>. An example
- is <tt>\parindent</tt>
- whose value specifies the current width of the indentation
- which begins paragraphs. Multiples of such length commands may be specified,
- for example by writing <tt>2.5\parindent</tt> or <tt>-0.1\parindent</tt>.
-<p>
- Some length commands are
-<ul>
-<li><tt>\parindent</tt> - normal paragraph indentation
-<li><a href="baselineskip.html"><tt>\baselineskip</tt></a> -
- normal vertical distance between lines in a paragraph
-<ul><li><a href="baselineskip.html"><tt>\baselinestretch</tt></a> - multiplies
- <tt>\baselineskip</tt></ul>
-<li><a href="parskip.html"><tt>\parskip</tt></a> -
- the <strong>extra</strong> vertical space between
- paragraphs
-<li><a href="textwidth.html"><tt>\textwidth</tt></a> -
- the width of text on the page
-<li><a href="textwidth.html"><tt>\linewidth</tt></a> -
- width of a line in the <strong>local</strong>
- environment
-<li><tt>\textheight</tt> - the height of text on the page
-<li><a href="unitlength.html"><tt>\unitlength</tt></a> - units of
- lenght in <a href="ltx-43.html">Picture</a> Environment
-</ul>
-All length commands are robust and <strong>should not</strong> be preceded
-by a <tt>\protect</tt> command.
-
-<h2><a name="rubber">Rubber lengths</a></h2>
-Most lengths have a fixed value. However, LaTeX also allows for "rubber"
-lengths; these have a natural length plus a degree of elasticity. For
-example, the <tt>\fill</tt> length command has a natural length of zero
-but is infinitely stretchable, so that a space of width <tt>\fill</tt> will
-try to stretch as much as possible. Multiplying a rubber length by a fixed
-factor destroys its elasticity: <tt>0.5\fill</tt> becomes a rigid length
-with a value of zero.
-
-<h2>Setting values for length commands</h2>
-The following LaTeX commands define and manipulate the value of length
-commands
-<ul>
-<li><A href="ltx-87.html"><tt>\newlength</tt></A> - define a new length command
-<p>
-<li><A href="ltx-88.html"><tt>\setlength</tt></A>
-<li><A href="ltx-89.html"><tt>\addtolength</tt></A>
-<p>
-<li><A href="ltx-90.html"><tt>\settowidth</tt></A>
-<li><A href="ltx-311.html"><tt>\settoheight</tt></A>
-<li><A href="ltx-312.html"><tt>\settodepth</tt></A>
-</ul>
-
-<h2>Commands that add space</h2>
-<ul>
-<li>Horizontal space
- <ul>
- <li><a href="ltx-238.html"><tt>\hfill</tt></a>
- <li><a href="ltx-241.html"><tt>\hspace</tt></a>
- </ul>
-<li>Vertical Space
- <ul>
- <li><a href="ltx-198.html"><tt>\addvspace</tt></a>
- <li><a href="ltx-318.html"><tt>\smallskip</tt></a>
- <li><a href="ltx-266.html"><tt>\medskip</tt></a>
- <li><a href="ltx-206.html"><tt>\bigskip</tt></a>
- <li><a href="ltx-345.html"><tt>\vfill</tt></a>
- <li><a href="ltx-347.html"><tt>\vspace</tt></a>
- </ul>
-</ul>
-<hr>
-Back to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 23 Oct 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-87.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-87.html
deleted file mode 100644
index d0cfcc367d2..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-87.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,21 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \newlength</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\newlength</font></h1>
-<p>
- <tt>\newlength{\gnat}</tt>
-<p>
-
- The <tt>\newlength</tt> command defines the mandatory argument, <tt>\gnat</tt>,
- as a
- length command with a value of 0in. An error occurs if a <tt>\gnat</tt>
- command already exists.
-<hr>
-See <a href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</a><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 8 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-88.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-88.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 54623e8ddb3..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-88.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,22 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \setlength</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\setlength</font></h1>
-<p>
- <tt>\setlength{len-cmd}{len}</tt>
-<p>
-
- The <tt>\setlength</tt> command is used to set the value of a length command,
- <tt>len-cmd</tt>, which is specified as the first argument.
- The <tt>len</tt> argument can be expressed in any terms of length LaTeX
- understands, i.e., inches (in), millimeters (mm), points (pt), etc.
-
-<hr>
-See <a href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</a><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 9 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-89.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-89.html
deleted file mode 100644
index f6b77694576..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-89.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \addtolength</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\addtolength</font></h1>
-<p>
- <tt>\addtolength{len-cmd}{len}</tt>
-<p>
-
- The <tt>\addtolength</tt> command increments a
- <a href="ltx-86.html#lencmd">length command</a>,
- <tt>len-cmd</tt>, which is specified by the first argument, by the amount
- specified in the <tt>len</tt> argument. It can be a negative amount.
-<p>
-As an example,
-<pre>
- <tt>\addtolength{<a href="parskip.html">\parskip</a>}{-.1\parskip}</tt>
-</pre>
-decreases the value of <tt>\parskip</tt> by 10%.
-<hr>
-See <a href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</a><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 9 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-90.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-90.html
deleted file mode 100644
index ee987ef0a6a..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-90.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,21 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \settowidth</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\settowidth</font></h1>
-<p>
- <tt>\settowidth{len-cmd}{text}</tt>
-<p>
-
- The <tt>\settowidth</tt> command sets the value of a
- <a href="ltx-86.html#lencmd">length command</a>, <tt>len-cmd</tt>,
- which is specified as the first argument, equal to
- the width of the <tt>text</tt> argument in the current font.
-<hr>
-See <a href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</a><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 9 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-91.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-91.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 1aaa58df93a..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-91.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,78 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX Letters</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Letters</font></h1>
- You can use LaTeX to typeset letters, both personal and business. The
- letter document style is designed to make a number of letters at once,
- although you can make just one if you so desire.
-<p>
- Your *.tex source file has the same
- <a href="input.html#structure">minimum commands</a> as the other
- document styles, i.e., you must have the following commands as a
- minimum:
-<pre>
- <tt>\documentstyle{letter}
- <a href="ltx-315.html">\signature{Your Name}</a>
- <a href="ltx-93.html">\address{Return address}</a>
- \begin{document}
- ... First letter ...
- ... Second letter ...
- ...
- \end{document}</tt>
-</pre>
-Note that the <tt>\address</tt> and <tt>\signature</tt> commands are
-<a href="declarations.html">declarations</a> and follow the usual
-scope rules. They are generally placed in the preamble, as indicated here,
-and apply to all letters in the file.
-<p>
- Each letter is a letter <a href="ltx-27.html">environment</a>,
- whose argument is the name and
- address of the recipient. For example, a typical letter might have<pre>
- <tt>\begin{letter}{Mr. John Doe \\ 2345 Jones St.
- \\ Oakland, CA 91123}
- <a href="ltx-97.html">\opening{Dear John,}</a>
- ...
- text of letter
- ...
- <a href="ltx-98.html">\closing{Best regards,}</a>
- \end{letter}</tt>
-</pre>
- The letter itself begins with the
- <a href="ltx-97.html"><tt>\opening</tt></a> command. The text of the
- letter follows. It is typed as ordinary LaTeX input. Commands that
- make no sense in a letter, like <tt>\chapter,</tt> don't work. The letter
- closes with a
- <a href="ltx-98.html"><tt>\closing</tt></a> command.
-<h2>Closing matter</h2>
- Several commands may be used after the <tt>\closing</tt> command:
-<ul>
-<li><tt>\ps{PS text}</tt> command produces a "P.S."
-<li><tt>\cc{text}</tt> command produces the usual "cc: text".
-<li><tt>\encl{list of enclosures}</tt> command produces an "encl:" list
-</ul>
-<h2>Date</h2>
-The <a href="ltx-330.html"><tt>\today</tt></a> command is used by the
-letter <a href="ltx-22.html">document style</a> to generate the date.
-If you wish a fixed date, rather than the current date, you should use<pre>
- <tt><a href="ltx-18.html">\renewcommand</a>{\today}{Month day, year}</tt>
-</pre>
-This may be put in the preamble if it is to apply to all letters in the
-file, or just before the <tt>\opening</tt> command if it is to apply to
-just that letter.
-<hr>
-See also
-<ul>
-<li><a href="ltx-93.html"><tt>\address</tt></a>
-<li><A href="ltx-98.html"><tt>\closing</tt></A>
-<li><a href="ltx-261.html"><tt>\location</tt></a>
-<li><A href="ltx-97.html"><tt>\opening</tt></A>
-<li><a href="ltx-315.html"><tt>\signature</tt></a>
-<li><a href="ltx-323.html"><tt>\telephone</tt></a>
-</ul>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 24 Jun 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-93.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-93.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 28fcacada52..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-93.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,22 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \address</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\address</font></h1>
-<tt>\address{Return address}</tt>
-<p>
- The return address, as it should appear on the letter and the
- envelope. Separate lines of the address should be separated by
-<a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a>
- commands. If you do not make an <tt>\address</tt> declaration, then the
- letter will be formatted for copying onto your organization's
- standard letterhead. If you give an <tt>\address</tt> declaration, then the
- letter will be formatted as a personal letter.
-<hr>
-See <a href="ltx-91.html">Letters</a><br>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 28 Apr 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-97.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-97.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 226af36881b..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-97.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,20 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \opening</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\opening</font></h1>
- <tt>\opening{text}</tt>
-<p>
- The letter begins with the <tt>\opening</tt> command. The mandatory argument,
- <tt>text</tt>, is what ever text you wish to start your letter, for example:
-<pre>
- <tt>\opening{Dear John,}</tt>
-</pre>
-</body>
-<hr>
-See <a href="ltx-91.html">Letters</a><br>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 24 Jun 1995.
-</address>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-98.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-98.html
deleted file mode 100644
index e505cb235b9..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-98.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,23 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \closing</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\closing</font></h1>
- <tt>\closing{text}</tt>
-<p>
- The letter closes with a <tt>\closing</tt> command, where the
-mandatory argument, <tt>text</tt> is the desired text, for example:
-<pre>
- <tt>\closing{Sincerely yours,}</tt>
-</pre>
-The signature will be taken from the
-<a href="ltx-315.html"><tt>\signature</tt></a> declaration.
-<hr>
-See <a href="ltx-91.html">Letters</a><br>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 24 Jun 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-99.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-99.html
deleted file mode 100644
index c83b00674c1..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-99.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,40 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX Line and Page Breaking</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Line and Page Breaking</font></h1>
- The first thing LaTeX does when processing ordinary text is to
- translate your input file into a string of glyphs and spaces. To
- produce a printed document, this string must be broken into lines, and
- these lines must be broken into pages. In some environments, you do
- the line breaking yourself with the <tt>\\</tt> command, but LaTeX usually does
- it for you.
-
-<H2>Commands for line and page breaks</H2>
-<ul>
-<li><A href="ltx-181.html">\\</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-182.html">\-</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-244.html">\hyphenation</A>
-<p>
-<li><A href="ltx-212.html">\cleardoublepage</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-213.html">\clearpage</A>
-<p>
-<li><A href="ltx-275.html">\newline</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-258.html">\linebreak</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-281.html">\nolinebreak</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-276.html">\newpage</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-289.html">\pagebreak</A>
-<li><A href="ltx-283.html">\nopagebreak</A>
-</ul>
-
-</body>
-<hr>
-For page numbering, see <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a><br>
-To refer to a page number in the text, see
- <a href="ltx-291.html"><tt>\pageref</tt></a><br>
-Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 20 Oct 1995.
-</address>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-tar.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-tar.html
deleted file mode 100644
index ddb8132efbe..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-tar.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,102 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head>
-<title>Hypertext LaTeX Help files</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff"
-text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Hypertext LaTeX Help files</font></h1>
-
-<p>If you find Hypertext Help with LaTeX to be useful, you are welcome to
-obtain the complete set of files and install them on your own machine.
-Retrieval and installation instructions are given below.
-They may be installed for use either with a webserver, which
-will ease network traffic and probably give you faster access,
-or they may be installed as local files which may be "read"
-with an HTML viewer, such as Mosaic, Cello, Lynx, Netscape, etc.
-without the necessity of a network connection.</p>
-
-<p>To facilitate off-network usage,
-the files generally have only local (within the same directory) hypertext
-links. All links to "external" URLs, including much LaTeX information
-available on the Web, have been restricted to one file in this set other than
-the current one.</p>
-
-<p>Although it is not required, if you make these files available on a public
-Web server, please send a note to
-<a href="mailto:webmaster@giss.nasa.gov">webmaster@giss.nasa.gov</a>
-so that we can add you to the list of
-<a href="mirror.html">mirror sites</a>.</p>
-
-
-<hr>
-
-<p>The files are available via anonymous ftp as a
-<a href="ftp://ftp.giss.nasa.gov/pub/sgreen/latex/latex.tar.Z">Unix-compressed
-tar file</a> (about 125 KByte) or
-<a href="ftp://ftp.giss.nasa.gov/pub/sgreen/latex/latex.tar.gz">gzipped
-tar file</a> (about 85 KByte).
-Your Web browser can probably retrieve the files via the above link, or they
-can be retrieved by anonymous ftp to ftp.giss.nasa.gov.
-Login as anonymous and give your e-mail address as the password,
-then switch to binary mode and download the file by issuing the
-commands:</p>
-
-<pre>
- bin
- cd pub/sgreen/latex
- get filename.tar.Z
-</pre>
-
-<p>or</p>
-
-<pre>
- bin
- cd pub/sgreen/latex
- get filename.tar.gz
-</pre>
-
-<p>After downloading the file on your local machine, issue the
-Unix commands:</p>
-
-<pre>
- uncompress filename.tar.Z
- tar -xf filename.tar
-</pre>
-
-or
-
-<pre>
- gunzip filename.tar.gz
- tar -xf filename.tar
-</pre>
-
-
-<p>(Note: some Web software, such as Mosaic, will automatically
-uncompress the file after retrieving it, in which case save it as
-<code>filename.tar</code> and execute only the <code>tar -xf</code>
-line above.) This will create a subdirectory named
-<code>latex</code> in your current directory which contains the complete
-set of html files and which requires about 1 MByte of disk space.
-The "Introduction" file is <code>index.html</code> and the Table of
-Contents page is <code>ltx-2.html</code>. </p>
-
-<p>You may rename or move the entire <code>latex</code> subdirectory
-if desired; all file references are local to this directory so links
-should continue to work.</p>
-
-<hr>
-
-<ul>
- <li><a href="index.html">Back to the Introduction</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-2.html">On to the Table of Contents</a>
-</ul>
-
-<hr>
-
-<address>
-Page revised: 1998-05-21, RBS
-</address>
-
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/mathfonts.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/mathfonts.html
deleted file mode 100644
index e5b78af08ee..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/mathfonts.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,87 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX math fonts and styles</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Math fonts and styles</font></h1>
-
-<h2>Math styles</h2>
-The following applies to both LaTeX 2.09 and LaTeX2e.
-<p>
-There are four styles used in typesetting <a href="ltx-115.html">math
-formulas</a> which affect the size and certain formatting parameters
-(notably the placement of sub and superscripts on <a href="ltx-408.html">
-variable size symbols</a>).
-<ul>
-<li><tt>\textstyle</tt> - default in the running text and in
- <a href="ltx-202.html">array</a> environment
-<li><tt>\displaystyle</tt> - default for displayed equations
-<li><tt>\scriptstyle</tt> - default for first-level sub and superscripts
-<li><tt>\scriptscriptstyle</tt> - default for higher-level sub and superscripts
-</ul>
-All four of these may be used in math mode as
-<a href="declarations.html">declarations</a> to <strong>force</strong> the
-type size and formatting to a style other than what would normally be used.
-<p>
-For example, to get a superscript that is the same size as the running text:
-<pre> <tt>$e^{\textstyle -E/kT}</tt>$ </pre>
-<p>
-As another example, the limits on a summation symbol are normally placed
-below and above the symbol in <tt>display</tt> style and in normal sub and
-superscript position in <tt>textstyle</tt>. One could <strong>force</strong>
-the below/above placement in running text by using:
-<pre> <tt>\displaystyle $<a href="ltx-408.html">\sum</a>_{n=0}^<a href="ltx-407.html">\infty</a> x_n$</tt></pre>
-although it should be noted that this might cause LaTeX to leave extra
-space between the text lines which might not be desirable.
-
-<h2>LaTeX 2.09 fonts</h2>
-The regular <a href="ltx-177.html">type style</a> declarations can be
-used in <a href="ltx-115.html#math">math mode</a>.
-They affect only letters (including upper case <a href="ltx-405.html">Greek</a>
-letters) but not symbols
-(or lower case <a href="ltx-405.html">Greek</a> letters). Two additional style
-<a href="declarations.html">declarations</a> which can be used
-<strong>only</strong> in math mode are
-<ul>
-<li><tt>\mit</tt>
-<li><tt><a href="ltx-407.html">\cal</a></tt>
-</ul>
-The former is math italic style; it spaces letters as if they were words,
-however, not as if they were each separate math symbols.
-The latter produces upper case calligraphic letters.
-
-<h2>LaTeX2e math fonts</h2>
-The following <a href="declarations.html">declarations</a> change the style
-only of letters, numbers, and uppercase <a href="ltx-405.html">Greek</a>.
-<ul>
-<li><tt>\mathit</tt> - same as <tt>\mit</tt> in 2.09 (see above)
-<li><tt>\mathrm</tt> - Roman
-<li><tt>\mathbf</tt> - Bold face
-<li><tt>\mathsf</tt> - San Serif
-<li><tt>\mathtt</tt> - Typewriter style
-<li><tt><a href="ltx-407.html">\mathcal</a></tt> - Calligraphic
-</ul>
-All of these produce spacing appropriate for text; they do not interpret each
-letter as a separate math symbol.
-<p>
-The <a href="boldmath.html"><tt>\boldmath</tt></a> declaration causes
-everything (including symbols) in a formula to be in a bold font.
-Note that this differs somewhat from the same declaration in 2.09 which
-did not affect some symbols.
-<hr>
-Related topics
-<ul>
-<li><a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</a>
- <ul><li><a href="ltx-177.html">Styles</a>
- <li><a href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</a>
- <li><a href="fonts2e.html">LaTeX2e fonts</a>
- </ul>
-<li><a href="ltx-408.html">Variable size symbols</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-407.html">Miscellaneous symbols</a>
-</ul>
-Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 2 Jun 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/mirror.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/mirror.html
deleted file mode 100644
index fd87330c1bf..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/mirror.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,125 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Hypertext Help with LaTeX - Mirror Sites</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br>
-<font color="#cc0000">Mirror Sites</font></h1>
-
-<p>Copies of <strong>Hypertext Help with LaTeX</strong> are available
-from several other Web sites which might provide faster access depending
-on your location.
-However, these files may not be quite as up-to-date as the original files at
-<a href="http://www.giss.nasa.gov/latex/">NASA Goddard Institute for
-Space Studies, New York, NY, USA</a>.</p>
-
-<p>The following mirror sites were last verified on December 3, 1998.
-Please contact
-<a href="mailto:webmaster@giss.nasa.gov">webmaster@giss.nasa.gov</a>
-if you discover that one of these sites is no longer available or
-if you know of additional sites that should be listed.</p>
-
-
-<dl>
-
-<dt><b>Australia</b>
-<dd><a href="http://ecco.bsee.swin.edu.au/text/hyperlatex/">Swinburne
- University of Technology</a>
- <!-- verified 19981203 -->
-
-<dt><b>Brazil</b>
-<dd><a href="http://www.cos.ufrj.br/~gabriel/latex/">Universidade Federal
- do Rio de Janeiro</a>
- <!-- verified 19981203 -->
-
-<dt><b>Canada</b>
-<dd><a href="http://www.cs.ualberta.ca/~vladimir/latex/">Dept. Of Computing
- Science, University of Alberta</a>
- <!-- verified 19981203 -->
-
-<dd><a href="http://sault.qucis.queensu.ca/wright/latex/">Dept. Of Computing
- and Information Science, Queen's University</a>
- <!-- verified 19981203 -->
-
-<dt><b>Chile</b>
-<dd><a href="http://www.dim.uchile.cl/documents/giss-latex/">Departamento
- de Ingenier&#237;a Matem&#225;tica, Universidad de Chile</a>
- <!-- verified 19981203 -->
-
-<dt><b>Denmark</b>
-<dd><a href="http://www.astro.ku.dk/help/LaTeX/">Niels Bohr Institute for
- Astronomy, Physics and Geophysics, University of Copenhagen</a>
- <small>(May 1995 copy)</small>
- <!-- verified 19981203 -->
-
-<dt><b>Germany</b>
-<dd><a href="http://www-ti.informatik.uni-tuebingen.de/~frech/latex/">Arbeitsbereich
- Technische Informatik, University of T&#252;bingen</a>
- <!-- verified 19981203 -->
-
-<dt><b>India</b>
-<dd><a href="http://www.aero.iitm.ernet.in/dcf/LaTeX/">Indian Institute
- of Technology, Madras</a>
- <!-- verified 19981203 -->
-
-<dt><b>Ireland</b>
-<dd><a href="http://www.eeng.dcu.ie/local-docs/latex-help/">School of
- Electonic Engineering, Dublin City University</a>
- <!-- verified 19981203 -->
-
-<!-- not responding 19981203
-<dt><b>Mexico</b>
-<dd><a href="http://ixmati.uam.mx/comp/LaTeX/LaTeXHelp">UAM-Iztapalapa</a>
--->
-
-<!-- not responding 19981203
-<dt><b>Netherlands</b>
-<dd><a href="http://www.fys.ruu.nl/~fange/LaTeX/">Universiteit Utrecht</a>
--->
-
-<dt><b>Norway</b>
-<dd><a href="http://mitra.phys.uit.no/edb/latex/">University of
- Troms&#248;</a>
- <small>(May 1995 copy)</small>
- <!-- verified 19981203 -->
-
-<dt><b>Poland</b>
-<dd><a href="http://zon8.physd.amu.edu.pl/LaTeX/">Institute of Physics,
- Adam Mickiewicz University</a>
- <small>(November 1995 copy)</small>
- <!-- verified 19981203 -->
-
-<dt><b>Portugal</b>
-<dd><a href="http://www.astro.up.pt/LaTeX/">Center for Astrophysics,
- University of Porto</a>
- <!-- verified 19981203 -->
-
-<dt><b>Russia</b>
-<dd><a href="http://www.izmiran.rssi.ru/doc/latex/">Institute of
- Terrestrial Magnetism, Ionosphere and Radiowave Propagation</a>
- <!-- verified 19981203 -->
-
-<dt><b>Sweden</b>
-<dd><a href="http://www.ce.chalmers.se/~case/Help/LaTeX/">Dept.
- of Computer Engineering, Chalmers University of Technology</a>
- <!-- verified 19981203 -->
-
-<dt><b>Switzerland</b>
-<dd><a href="http://www.ee.ethz.ch/isg/tardis/soft/latex/green/">Dept.
- of Electrical Engineering, Federal Institute of Technology</a>
- <!-- verified 19981203 -->
-
-<dt><b>United States</b>
-<dd><a href="http://www.giss.nasa.gov/latex/">NASA Goddard Institute
- for Space Studies</a>
-
-</dl>
-
-<hr>
-
-<address>
-Page revised: 1998-12-03, RBS
-</address>
-
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/parskip.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/parskip.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 0f22ae706d1..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/parskip.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \parskip</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff"
-text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\parskip</font></h1>
-<tt>\parskip</tt> is the extra vertical space inserted before a
-paragraph. It has a natural length of zero but should be a
-<a href="ltx-86.html#rubber">rubber length</a> so that it may
-be stretched in a
-<a href="ltx-227.html">flushbottom</a> environment.
-<p>
-To increase <tt>\parskip</tt> to skip a line between paragraphs one
-could use
-<pre>
- <tt><a href="ltx-89.html">\addtolength</a>{<a href="parskip.html">\parskip</a>}{<a href="baselineskip.html">\baselineskip}</a></tt>
-</pre>
-<hr>
-See also: <A href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</A><br>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 23 Oct 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/refs.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/refs.html
deleted file mode 100644
index b8d15e4f741..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/refs.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,53 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>LaTeX Reference Books</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">LaTeX Reference Books</font></h1>
-
-
-<p The standard reference source for LaTeX is
-<cite>A Document Preparation System: LaTeX</cite>,
-by Leslie Lamport, ISBN 0-201-52983-1, published
-jointly by the American Mathematical Society and Addison-Wesley
-Publishing Company. The 2nd edition, 1994, describes LaTeX2e, the
-second widely distributed version of LaTeX. The first edition of this
-book, which appeared in 1985, described LaTeX 2.09.</p>
-
-<p>The standard reference for what goes on inside TeX is
-<cite>The TeXbook</cite>
-by Donald E. Knuth, ISBN 0-201-13448-9, published jointly by
-the American Mathematical Society and Addison-Wesley.</p>
-
-<p>M. Goossens, F. Mittelbach, and A. Samarin,
-<cite>The LaTeX Companion</cite>, published
-by Addison-Wesley, ISBN 0-201-54199-8 (essential for the serious
-LaTeX hackers).</p>
-
-<p>L. Botway and C. Biemesderfer,
-<cite>LaTeX Command Summary</cite>, published by
-the TeX Users Group, Providence, RI is a good companion.</p>
-
-<p>A. Diller,
-<cite>LaTeX Line by Line</cite>, published by Wiley.</p>
-
-<p>N. Walsh,
-<cite><a href="http://www.ora.com/catalog/tex/">Making TeX Work</a></cite>,
-published by O'Reilly &amp; Associates, ISBN 1-56592-051-1.</p>
-
-<hr>
-
-<p>Other information is available <a href="externals.html">on the Web</a>.</p>
-
-<hr>
-
-<p>Back to the <a href="index.html">Introduction</a><br>
-Go to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a></p>
-
-<hr>
-
-<address>
-Revised: RBS, 20 February 1997<br>
-Thanks to Anthony Stone (Cambridge) for suggestions.
-</address>
-
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/stackrel.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/stackrel.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 1ae9cb1bc03..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/stackrel.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,90 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \stackrel and \mathop</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\stackrel</font></h1>
-<p>
-This can be used to stack something above something else; used in math mode.
-<pre>
- <tt>\stackrel{top}{bot}</tt>
-</pre>
-The first argument, <tt>top</tt>, is typset immediately above the
-second argument, <tt>bot</tt>; the former is set in the same
-math style as a superscript.
-<p>
-For example
-<pre>
- <tt>H$_2$CO$_3$ $\stackrel{<a href="ltx-304.html">\rm</a> heat}
- {<a href="ltx-406.html">\longrightarrow}</a>$ H$_2$O + CO$_2$</tt>
-</pre>
-will produce something like
-<pre><tt>
- heat
- H CO ------> H O + CO
- 2 3 2 2
-</tt></pre>
-Note that the the <a href="ltx-304.html"><tt>\rm</tt></a> declaration is used
-so that "heat" is set in Roman face and not math italics.
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br>a name="mathop">\mathop</a></h1>
-This command does not seem to be well documented but appears to work,
-at least in current versions of LaTeX 2.09.
-<p>
-The argument is considered to be a single <a href="ltx-408.html">variable
-sized math symbol</a> for purposes of placing limits below
-(<a href="ltx-179.html">subscripts</a>) and above
-(<a href="ltx-180.html">superscripts</a>) in
-<a href="mathfonts.html">display math</a> style. For example,
-<pre>
- <tt>\mathop{\sum \sum}_{i,j=1}^{N} a_i a_j</tt>
-</pre>
-would produce something like
-<pre>
- N
- --- ---
- \ \
- / / a a
- --- --- i j
- i,j
-</pre>
-It is possible to create <strong>two rows</strong> of "subscripts" by using
-a similar construction: The first row is created as subscripts of the symbol
-in the usual way and a lower row is created by placing this whole construct
-as the argument of a <tt>\mathop</tt> command with its own subscript. For
-example
-<pre>
- <tt>\mathop{\sum_{i,j=1}^{N}}_{i&gt;j}</tt>
-</pre>
-would produce something like
-<pre>
- N
- ---
- \
- /
- ---
- i,j=1
- i&gt;j
-</pre>
-
-<hr>
-Related topics
-<ul>
-<li><a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a>
- and <a href="ltx-117.html">Math Symbols</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-406.html">Arrows</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-404.html">Binary and relational opertors</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-223.html">Eqnarray Environment</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-224.html">Equation Environment</a>
-<li><a href="ltx-421.html">Displaymath Environment</a>
-<li><a href="mathfonts.html">Math Fonts and Styles</a>
-<p>
-<li><a href="ltx-287.html"><tt>\overbrace</tt></a>
-<li><a href="ltx-288.html"><tt>\overline</tt></a>
-<li><a href="ltx-335.html"><tt>\underbrace</tt></a>
-<li><a href="ltx-336.html"><tt>\underline</tt></a>
-</ul>
-Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 15 Aug 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/textwidth.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/textwidth.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 912c11d74be..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/textwidth.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,21 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \textwidth \linewidth</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\textwidth \linewidth</font></h1>
-<tt>\textwidth</tt> is the normal width of the text on a page. It should
-generally be changed only in the <a href="input.html#structure">preamble</a>.
-<p>
-<tt>\linewidth</tt> is the width of lines in the current environment. Normally
-equal to <tt>\textwidth</tt>, it may be different within an environment such
-as <a href="lists.html">list</a> or
-<a href="ltx-298.html">quote</a> environments.
-<hr>
-See also: <A href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</A><br>
-Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 23 Jun 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/toc.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/toc.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 5f975e1a36f..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/toc.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,26 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \tableofcontents</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\tableofcontents</font></h1>
-<p>
- A table of contents is produced with the
- <tt>\tableofcontents</tt> command. You
- put the command right where you want the table of contents to go;
- LaTeX does the rest for you.
- Entries are taken from the <a href="ltx-141.html">Sectioning</a> commands.
-<p>
- <tt>\tableofcontents</tt> produces a heading, but it does not
- automatically start a new page. If you want a new page after the
- table of contents, include a
- <a href="ltx-276.html"><tt>\newpage</tt></a> command after the
- <tt>\tableofcontents</tt> command.
-<p>
-<hr>
-See also <a href="ltx-170.html">Table of Contents</a><br>
-Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jun 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/trivlist.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/trivlist.html
deleted file mode 100644
index e73e8d4ba85..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/trivlist.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,30 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX trivlist</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">trivlist</font></h1>
-<p>
-<p><pre>
- <tt>\begin{trivlist}
- \item First item
- ....
- \end{trivlist}</tt>
-</pre>
-This is ike the <a href="ltx-260.html">List Environment</a>, but
-uses the currently defined values of
-list-making parameters. It is normally used to define an environment with a
-single item, with an <a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a> command
-as part of the environment definition.
-<hr>
-See <a href="lists.html">Lists</a>,
- <a href="ltx-260.html">List Environment</a>,
- <a href="ltx-27.html">Environments</a><br>
-Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 1 Jun 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
-
-
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/unitlength.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/unitlength.html
deleted file mode 100644
index f1bd14691d4..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/unitlength.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,24 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head><title>Help On LaTeX \unitlength</title></head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\unitlength</font></h1>
- <tt>\unitlength</tt>
-<p>
- The <tt>\unitlength</tt> command is a <a href="ltx-86.html">Length
- command</a>. It defines the units used in the
- <a href="ltx-43.html">Picture Environment</a>
-<p>
-The default value is 1 point (approximately 1/72 inch) but it may
-be changed using the <a href="ltx-88.html"><tt>\setlength</tt></a>
-command.
-<hr>
-See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>,
- <A href="ltx-43.html">Picture Environment</A><br>
-See also <a href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</a><br>
-Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
-<hr>
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 12 May 1995.
-</address>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/versions.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/versions.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 922e5070f98..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/versions.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,83 +0,0 @@
-<html>
-<head>
-<title>LaTeX 2.09 and LaTeX2e</title>
-</head>
-<body bgcolor="#ffffff"
-text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
-
-<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br>
-<font color="#cc0000">LaTeX 2.09 and LaTeX2e</font></h1>
-
-<p>The following information is excerpted from "A Document Preparation System:
-LaTeX" by Leslie Lamport, 2nd edition and/or "LaTeX2e for authors",
-by the LaTeX3 Project Team, June 1994.</p>
-
-<p>LaTex2e was produced in an attempt to reconcile the various, sometimes
-incompatble, "flavors" of LaTeX which were developing. Some of these
-included the New Font Selection Scheme (NFSS), SLITeX (for slides),
-AASTeX (the American Astronomical Society macros), etc. The major
-change to LaTeX2e is the method for trying to make the use of add-on
-packages more uniform by the introduction of "classes"
-and "packages." Most of the new commands are the "initial" commands,
-i.e., those which can appear only <em>before</em> the
-<tt>\documentclass</tt> command.</p>
-
-<p>A few standard LaTeX commands have been modified and a few new commands
-added, notably:</p>
-
-<ul>
- <li><a href="ltx-18.html"><tt>\newcommand</tt></a> (and related) commands,
- which now allow for an optional argument in newly defined commands
- <li><a href="ensuremath.html"><tt>\ensuremath</tt></a>
-</ul>
-
-
-<h2>Document Styles and Style Options</h2>
-
-<p>In LaTeX2e, documents begin with a <tt>\documentclass</tt> command. This
-replaces the LaTeX 2.09
-<a href="ltx-22.html"><tt>\documentstyle</tt></a> command. The
-<tt>\usepackage</tt> command has been added and is used in conjunction
-with <tt>\documentclass</tt>.</p>
-
-<p> aTeX2e still understands the old
-<a href="ltx-22.html"><tt>\documentstyle</tt></a> command; if it is
-encountered, LaTex2e enters <em>compatibility
-mode</em> in which most 2.09 input files should still be processed properly.</p>
-
-
-<h2>Type Styles and Sizes</h2>
-
-<p>LaTeX 2.09 commands for changing type style, for example, <tt>\tt</tt>,
-still work similarly in LaTeX2e.
-The major difference is that <tt>\sc</tt> and <tt>\sl</tt>
-can no longer be used in math mode (except when LaTeX2e is in
-<em>compatibility mode</em>, see above).</p>
-
-<p>However, <a href="fonts2e.html">a new set of commands</a>
-have been added to allow separate (and independent) specification of </p>
-
-<ul>
- <li>Shape
- <li>Series
- <li>Family
-</ul>
-
-<p>These can be combined to form a wide variety of type styles. If a style
-you specify is not available on your computer, LaTeX2e produce a warning
-message and will substitute a style it thinks is similar.</p>
-
-<hr>
-
-<p>Return to the <a href="index.html">Introduction</a><br>
-Go to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a></p>
-
-<hr>
-
-<address>
-Revised: Sheldon Green, 14 May 1995.
-</address>
-
-
-</body>
-</html>